EZZ010926 MV1000 Instructions

Super Energy-Saving Medium-Voltage AC Drive
FSDrive-MV1000
Instructions
Class: 2 kV, 3 kV, 4 kV, 6 kV, and 11 kV
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user
receives this manual.
MANUAL NO. EZZ010926
Receiving
Mechanical Installation
7
2
Electrical Installation
8
3
Start-Up Programming &

Operation
A
4
Troubleshooting
B
5
Periodic Inspection &

Maintenance
C
6
Options
D
7
Specifications
E
A
Copyright 2011 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information
contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions
Table of Contents
i.
PREFACE AND GENERAL SAFETY .................................................................... 7

i.1 Before Using the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Applicable Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
i.2 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Supplemental Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Drive Label Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
i.3 Mechanical Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
i.4 Notes on Using Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
General Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
i.5 Notes on Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Application to Existing Standard Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
i.6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Scope of Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.
RECEIVING .......................................................................................................... 23
1.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FSDrive-MV1000 Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Descriptions of Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Component Names and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformer Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cell Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.
24
25
25
28
29
29
31
32
36
36
36
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 39

2.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Checking the Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Side-by-Side Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Installing Cooling Exhaust Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Installing a Drive on a Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
2.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
2.4 Storing Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Short Term Storage of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Long Term Storage of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
3.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 73

3.1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Class: 2 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Class: 3 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Class: 4 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Class: 6 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Class: 11 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
3.3 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
3.4 Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Check Before Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Caution when Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
3.5 Main Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Main Circuit Terminals (Common to All Capacities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
3.6 Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Control Circuit Terminal Layout and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
3.7 Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
3.8 External Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Drive Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
3.9 Wiring Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
4.
START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION ................................................... 105

4.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
4.2 Using the Digital Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Keys and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
ALARM (ALM) LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Menu Structure for Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Switching between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Setup Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Subchart A-1: Simple Motor Setup Using V/f Control, or Serial Operation
of Multiple Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Subchart A-2: High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
4.5 Power Up and Checking the Operation Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Power Up the Drive and Checking the Operation Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.6 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Auto-Tuning Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Auto-Tuning Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Parameter Settings during Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Test Run with the Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.9 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
User Parameter Default Value (o2-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Access Level of Parameter (A1-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Password (A1-04, A1-05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 135

5.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.2 Motor Performance Fine-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fine-Tuning V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fine-Tuning Open Loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fine-Tuning Closed Loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Parameters to Minimize Motor Hunting and Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.3 Types of Faults, Alarms, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Types of Faults, Alarms, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fault, Alarm and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.4 Fault Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
5.6 Operator Programming Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.7 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.8 LED Indicators on the Controller and CCB (Cell Control Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
LED Indicators on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
LED Indications on the Cell Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.9 Copy Function Related Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.10 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.11 Troubleshooting without Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
List of Key Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Cannot Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button
or after Entering External Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Motor is Too Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large

Loads/Acceleration Time is Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency
Reference Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
PID Output Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Insufficient Starting Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off
(Motor Rotates During DC Injection Braking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Motor Does Not Restart after Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
6.
PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE..................................................... 187

6.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
6.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
6.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Part Replacement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
6.4 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Battery Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
6.5 Replacing the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Models and Number of Cooling Fans Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
6.6 Replacing Power Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Power Cell Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
6.7 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Storing Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
7.
OPTIONS ............................................................................................................ 207

7.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
7.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Built-in Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Panel Housed Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Separate Installation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
A.
SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 211

A.1 Model-Specific Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Class: 2 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Class: 3 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Class: 4 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Class: 6 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Class: 11 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
A.2 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Index
............................................................................................................................ 215
Revision History............................................................................................................. 220
i
Preface and General Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product that, if not heeded, may result
in fatality, personal injury, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the
consequences of ignoring these instructions.
i.1
i.2
i.3
i.4
i.5
i.6
BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NOTES ON USING DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NOTES ON MOTOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
i.1 Before Using the Product
i.1
Before Using the Product
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of FSDrive-MV1000-Series Drives. Read this manual
before attempting to install, wire, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future
reference. Also be sure that you understand all the precautions and safety information before attempting to use the
product.
Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for MV1000 series drives. Refer to the manual appropriate for your purpose.
Super Energy-Saving Medium-Voltage AC Drive FSDrive-MV1000 Instruction Manual (this book)
Manual No.: EZZ010926
This manual contains basic information required to install and wire the drive, in addition to an overview of
operating procedures, fault diagnostics, and maintenance and inspection.
It covers the basic operation and trial running of this product.
Super Energy-Saving Medium-Voltage AC Drive FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide
Manual No.: EZZ010930
This manual contains detailed information on parameter settings.
Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take advantage of higher performance features.
Symbols
The symbols used in this manual are explained below.
Note: Indicates important advice that must be followed. Also indicate low-level cautions that cause an alarm but do not involve a risk
of equipment damage, and supplementary notes.
TERMS
Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.
Terms and Abbreviations

TERMS
Drive, MV1000: Yaskawa FSDrive-MV1000 Series MV1000

V/f: V/f Control
OLV: Open Loop Vector Control
CLV: Closed Loop Vector Control
PM motor: Permanent Magnet Synchronous motor
Trademarks
The companies and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of those companies.
i.2 General Safety
i.2
General Safety
Supplemental Safety Information

General Precautions
The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or
shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to
all products to which this manual is applicable.
The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be
changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office.
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed
according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could
result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
i.2 General Safety
Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed all of the safety-related information in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings
in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power for the main circuit and controls is on.

Even when the power supply of the medium-voltage main circuit to the drive is shut off, it takes some time for the
internal capacitors to discharge. Wait until the CHARGE LED goes off before starting inspection. While an residual
electric charge remains in the capacitor, the surface and inside of the Power Cell will carry a high voltage, so there will
be a risk of death or serious injury. The heatsink of the Power Cell can become quite hot during operation, and proper
precautions should be taken to prevent burns. When replacing the cooling fan, shut off the main circuit's power and
then wait at least 15 minutes. Then, shut off the control circuit's power and make sure that the cooling fan has fully
stopped before starting the work.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard

Do not forget to include an emergency stop circuit in the application.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. A communication error between the digital operator keypad
and the drives internal control board may make it impossible to stop the drive with the digital operator.
After an emergency stop circuit has been wired, check to make sure it is operating properly.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The emergency stop circuit may fail to operate if left
unchecked. The user is fully responsible for properly wiring the emergency circuit.
Some systems may start moving in response to the supply of power alone, resulting in death or serious injury.
Make sure that there are no personnel around the drive, motor and machine before turning the power on. Also check
that couplings with motors, shaft keys and machinery are properly protected.

Never modify the drive.

Yaskawa is not responsible for the consequences of any modification of the product by the user or any client of the
user.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.

The drive should be installed, wired, repaired, inspected, and have its parts replaced, by someone with a thorough
knowledge of drive installation, adjustment and repair.
Fire Hazard
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
10
i.2 General Safety
NOTICE
Equipment Hazard
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.

Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Also check the cable wiring and selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact your Yaskawa
representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause
cannot be identified.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection in accordance with the standards in the country of use.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

This drive is suitable for circuits carrying a maximum current when shorted of 5 kVA, with a maximum voltage of
2640 Vac (class: 2 kV), 3630 Vac (class: 3 kV), 4576 Vac (class: 4 kV), 7260 Vac (class: 6 kV), or 12100 Vac (class: 11
kV).
If disinfectants or insecticides must be used to treat packing materials such as wooden frames, pallets, or plywood, the
packing materials must be treated before the product is packaged, and methods other than fumigation must be used.
Example: Heat treatment, where materials are kiln-dried to a core temperature of 56C for 30 minutes or more.
If the electronic products, which include stand-alone products and products installed in machines, are packed with
fumigated wooden materials, the electrical components may be greatly damaged by the gases or fumes resulting from
the fumigation process. In particular, disinfectants containing halogens, which includes chlorine, fluorine, bromine and
iodine can contribute to the erosion of the capacitors, and DOP gas (phthalate esters) can cause cracking of resins.
11
i.2 General Safety
Drive Label Warning

The following illustration show the locations of the warning labels on the drive. Always heed the warning signs.
Locations of Warning Information
Class: 2 kV
2.4kV
Warning information
nameplate A
Serial number nameplate
Warning information
nameplate B

Warning information
nameplate A
Class: 3 kV
3.0kV

Warning information nameplate A
Warning information nameplate B
Class: 4 kV
4.16kV
Warning information
Nameplate A
Warning information
Nameplate B

Warning information
Nameplate A
12
i.2 General Safety

Class: 6 kV
6.0kV
Warning information
nameplate C
Class: 11 kV
11.0kV
Warning information
information
Nameplate C
13
i.2 General Safety

Warning Information
Nameplate A
Nameplate B
&COCIGVQ/GFKWO8QNVCIG&TKXG'SWKROGPV
(CKNWTGVQEQORN[YKVJVJKUPQVKEGOC[ECWUGGSWKROGPVFCOCIG
&1016QDUVTWEVQTKPUVCNNCKTFWEVKPIVQGZJCWUVCKTQWVNGVUQPVQRQHVJGRCPGN
/CKPVCKPCKTHNQYVQVJGRCPGNUDGVYGGPCPFCPFJWOKFKV[CVQTNQYGTYKVJQWVEQPFGPUCVKQP

+PURGEVCPFENGCPRCPGNCKTHKNVGTUCRRTQZKOCVGN[QPEGCOQPVJVQOCKPVCKPRCPGNEQQNKPICKTHNQY

&1016OQFKH[QTCNVGTVJGOGFKWOXQNVCIGFTKXGGSWKROGPVKPCP[YC[PQVGZRNCKPGF
KPVJGKPUVTWEVKQPOCPWCN
5WEVKQPHKNVGT
'ZJCWUV1WVNGV
5WEVKQPHKNVGT
(QNNQYKPUVTWEVKQPOCPWCNRTQEGFWTGUYJGPRQYGTKPICFTKXGVJCVJCFDGGPUVQTGF
YKVJRQYGTQHHHQTOQPVJUQTOQTG

7UGRWVV[QTCRRTQXGFOCVGTKCNUVQENQUGEQPFWKVQRGPKPIUCHVGTGNGEVTKECNYKTKPI
(QNNQYKPUVTWEVKQPOCPWCNRTQEGFWTGUHQTCUUGODNKPIVJGEQQNKPIHCPEQXGTU
%GTVCKPOQFGNUJCXGEQQNKPIHCPEQXGTUVJCVTGSWKTGCUUGODN[
6TCPUHQTOGT2CPGN
14
%GNN2CPGN
02,5
i.2 General Safety

Danger Information
Nameplate C
%TWUJ*C\CTF(QNNQYVJGUGRTGECWVKQPUYJGPNKHVKPIVJGVTCPUHQTOGTRCPGN
.KHVKPIECDNGCEEGUUQRGPKPIU
&1016NKHVVJGVTCPUHQTOGTRCPGND[VJGRCPGNGZVGTKQT
1PN[RGTHQTONKHVKPICVCVVCEJOGPVRQKPVUQPVJGVTCPUHQTOGTDQF[
&1016CNNQYRGTUQPPGNWPFGTPGCVJVJGRCPGNFWTKPINKHVKPI
'PUWTGCNNRGTUQPPGNCTGENGCTQHVJGNKHVKPICTGCFWTKPINKHVKPI
(CKNWTGVQEQORK[OC[ECWUGFGCVJQTUGTKQWUKPLWT[HQGOHCNNKPIGSWKROGPV
6QRXKGYQHVJGVTCPUHQTOGTRCPGN
/GVCN.KHVKPIJQNGU
QPVTCPUHQTOGTDQF[
.KHVKPICPING

.KHVKPI2TQEGFWTG
4GOQXGNKHVKPIECDNGCEEGUUJQNGEQXGTUQPVQRRCPGNGZVGTKQT
2CUUVJGNKHVKPIECDNGVJTQWIJVJGNKHVKPIECDNGCEEGUUQRGPKPI
5GEWTGN[CVVCEJVJGNKHVKPIECDNGVQVJGHQWTFGUKIPCVGFOGVCN
NKHVKPIJQNGUQPVJGVTCPUHQTOGTDQF[
.KHVVJGVTCPUHQTOGTRCPGND[NKHVKPIVJGVTCPUHQTOGTDQF[

Asia
9JGPNKHVKPIWUGECWVKQPVQRTGXGPVFCOCIGVQVTCPUHQOGTQTRCPGNGZVGTKQT
(TQPVXKGYQHVJGVTCPUHQTOGTRCPGN
4GHGTVQVJGKPUVTWEVKQPOCPWCNHQTFGVCKNU
02,5
Note: This warning information is not indicated on 2-kV and 4-kV class drives.
15
i.3 Mechanical Interlock
i.3
Mechanical Interlock
To use a mechanical interlock with 2-kV class and 4-kV class drives, install the same mechanical interlock on the
incoming circuit breaker panel as that used with the drive.
To open the panel door for the high voltage section of the drive, use the following procedure.
1. Turn off the incoming circuit breaker and remove the key of the mechanical interlock.
2. Use the key to unlock the mechanical lock of the drive.
Figure i.1
A Medium voltage panel

(Power Cells)
B Low voltage panel
(Controller)
C Medium voltage panel

(Transformer)
Figure i.1 Specification of Interlock Key (Kirk Key type F-Flat mounted)
16
i.4 Notes on Using Drives
i.4
Notes on Using Drives
Selection
Power Supply Capacity
Select a main circuit power supply with a capacity larger than that of the drive to be connected, considering the power
factor and efficiency. When connecting multiple drives to a single power supply, select a power supply with a capacity
larger than the sum of the power required by all the drives to be connected. Even when the power supply has sufficient
capacity, the power supply voltage may drop when the power is turned on, causing malfunction of connected devices if
the power supply has a large power impedance.
Drive Capacity
When running multiple induction motors in parallel using a single drive, the capacity of the drive should be larger than
1.1 times the total motor rated current.
Emergency Stop
When the drive faults out, a protective function is activated and drive output is shut off. This, however, does not stop the
motor immediately. Some type of mechanical brake may be needed if it is necessary to halt the motor faster than the Fast
Stop function is able to.
Installation
Ambient Environment
Keep the drive in a clean environment that is free from airborne oil mist, corrosive gas, flammable gas, lint and dust.
Install the fan cover at the top of the panel before starting operation. Any modification to the outside of the panel cooling
fan, such as connecting air exhaust duct, may reduce air flow for cooling and cause overheating and faults. Do not use air
exhaust duct.
Operating Environment
When the power to the drive is turned back on after it has been stopped for a long time, for example for periodical
inspection, electrical components inside dry-type transformers and Power Cell may be subject to condensation depending
on the temperature and humidity of the switch room. This condensation will reduce insulation and cause unanticipated
accidents (e.g. accidents due to short circuits). You are recommended to install a dehumidifier in the switch room.
Drive Storage
When storing the drive as is in a storage facility or in the installed state, observe the following points to maintain its
reliability.
Short term storage of the drive
Short term storage refers to cases where the drive is stored for up to one month after unpacking or up to three months
after shipping. Secure a storage environment that satisfies the conditions cited for the drives environmental
specification. Note that an ambient temperature of up to 60C is acceptable.
Long term storage of the drive
Long term storage refers to cases where the drive is stored for more than one month after unpacking or more than three
months after shipping. Contact Yaskawa if long term storage is required. Note that an ambient temperature of up to
50C is acceptable.
Store the spare parts without unpacking them. For details, refer to the storage method described in the instruction
manual.
Compliance with Local Laws
Please comply with the law of the relevant country when you install the drive panel. For details, contact your Yaskawa
representative.
17

Effects of Distortion in Power Supply
When the power supply voltage is originally distorted, or when multiple devices and the drive are connected to the same
power supply, drive harmonics from the power supply system flow into the drive, resulting in high relative harmonic
content.
Settings
Driving Multiple Induction Motors
Use V/f control when running multiple induction motors using a single drive.
Upper Limits
The drive can be operated at high speeds of up to 120 Hz, and making incorrect settings is dangerous. Set an upper limit
by using the upper limit frequency setting function.
The default setting for the maximum output frequency when operating with external input signals is 60 Hz.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque that the motor generates, the load torque and the inertia
moment (GD2). Set a longer accel/decel time when the stall prevention function is activated during accel/decel. When the
stall prevention function is activated, the accel/decel time is extended to cover the time that the function operates. To
achieve even faster acceleration and deceleration, select motors, and a drive, with greater capacity.
General Handling
Wiring Check
Never short the output terminals of the drive or apply voltage from the power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).
This will damage the drive.
Carry out wiring that conforms to the wire gauges and tightening torques described in this manual. Conduct a thorough
check of wiring and sequences before turning the power on.
Breaker or Magnetic Contactor Selection and Installation
Select a breaker with sufficient capacity for the main circuit power supply side of the drive, taking the inrush current
from the transformer into account.
Avoid using the breaker or magnetic contactor for frequent starting or stopping. This may damage the drive. Do not
switch the breaker or magnetic contactor ON/OFF more than twice a day. If it is operated more frequently, install an
optional inrush current suppression circuit between the power supply and the drive. Use a low-surge type Vacuum Circuit
Breaker for drive primary side breaker.
Inspection and Maintenance
electric charge remains in the capacitor, the surface and inside of the Power Cell will carry a high voltage, so there will be
a risk of death or serious injury. The heatsink of the Power Cell can become quite hot during operation, and proper
precautions should be taken to prevent burns.
When replacing the cooling fan, shut off the main circuit's power and then wait at least 15 minutes. Then, shut off the
control circuit's power and make sure that the cooling fan has fully stopped before starting the work.
Wiring
When wiring UL/cUL-compliant drives, refer to the notes on complying with the UL and cUL standards given in the
instruction manuals. For details, contact your Yaskawa representative.
Transportation and Installation
Never steam clean the drive. During transportation and installation, the drive must never be exposed to an atmosphere
containing a halogen gas such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
18

Hoisting
With some large capacity drives, the transformer, rather than the transformer panel itself, must be hoisted directly. The
drive may deform or fall down if the drive panel frame is hoisted. For details, refer to the installation method described in
the instruction manual.
Radio Frequency Interference
Inputs and outputs of the drive (main circuit) contain harmonic components that may adversely affect communication
devices, such as AM radios, used in the vicinity. Use high-voltage cables and ground any shielded cables. Separate cables
for control from high-current circuits (main circuit and relay sequence circuits) to avoid induction from peripheral
devices. (It is advisable to separate them by a distance of 30 cm or more.)
Leakage Current
Harmonic leakage current passes through stray capacitance between the drive power lines, ground and the motor lines.
Consider taking measures against this leakage current.
19
i.5 Notes on Motor Operation
i.5
Notes on Motor Operation
Application to Existing Standard Motors

Insulation Voltage
Consider voltage tolerance levels and insulation in applications with high input voltage or particularly long wiring
distances. Contact Yaskawa for consultation.
High Speed Operation
Running a motor beyond its rated speed may lead to problems imposed by vibration or the durability of motor bearings.
Contact the manufacturer of the motor for details.
Torque Characteristics
When driven by a drive, the torque characteristics of the motor differ from when it is driven with a commercial power
supply. Therefore, the load torque characteristics that the motor drives need to be confirmed.
Vibration and Shock
The PWM control with multiple outputs connected in the drive reduces motor oscillation to the same level as in operation
by commercial power supply. However, the motor oscillation is slightly larger due to the following factors.
Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system
Take particular caution when using a variable speed drive for an application that is conventionally run by commercial
power at a constant speed. Installing shock absorbing rubber under the base of the motor and using Frequency Jump
function can be effective measures.
Residual unbalance of the rotating motor
Particular care is required when running the motor beyond its rated speed.
Subsynchronous Resonance
Subsynchronous resonance may occur in fans, blowers, turbines, and other applications with high load inertia, as well
as in motors with a relatively long shaft. Yaskawa recommends using the closed loop vector control for such
applications.
20
i.6 Warranty Information
i.6
Warranty Information
Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to the end user or eighteen months from the date of
shipment from Yaskawas factory, whichever comes first.
Scope of Warranty
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the
warranty period, Yaskawa will bear the cost of repairing the unit. However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center
determines that the problem with a Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawas workmanship or materials, then
the end user will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside the scope of this
warranty are:
Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the customer is determined to
be responsible.
Problems due to additions or modifications made to the Yaskawa product by the customer without Yaskawas
understanding.
Problems due to the use of the Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recommended specifications.
Problems caused by unavoidable occurrences such as natural disaster or fire.
Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within the country where the product was purchased. However, after-sales service is
available for customers outside of the country where the product was purchased for a reasonable fee.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customers or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawas defective products whether
within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.
Restrictions
This product is not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human
lives or health.
End users who intend to use this product for devices or systems relating to transportation, health care, space aviation,
atomic or electric power, or underwater use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales
office beforehand.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed
in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life,
or in a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to
minimize the likelihood of any accident.
21
i.6 Warranty Information
22
1
Receiving
This chapter explains how to inspect the drive upon receipt, and describes the parts of the
drive, their names and configuration.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPONENT NAMES AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
25
29
32
23
1.1 Section Safety
1.1
Section Safety
WARNING
If any parts in the drive are damaged or missing, stop the drive and contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office.
Electrical circuits could fail when current is applied, resulting in death, serious injury, or fire.
NOTICE

A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a motor being run with a commercial
power supply and its operating speed range may be reduced due to the motor is cooling capacity.
Check in advance that the drive is suited to the load of the motor to be used.
24
1.2 General Description
1.2
General Description
FSDrive-MV1000 Model Selection

Class: 2 kV
Table 1.1 MV1000 Models (Class: 2 kV)
Input
Voltage
(kV)
2.4
Power
Output
Supply
Frequency Voltage
(kV)
(Hz)
60
2.4
Model
CIMR-MV2
Motor Power <1>

(HP)
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Nominal Capacity
(kVA)
AAA052
AAA058
AAA077
AAA093
AAA102
AAA115
AAA135
AAA160
AAA180
AAA205 <2>
AAA220 <2>
AAA280 <2>
AAA330 <2>
AAA390 <2>
AAA440 <2>
AAA505 <2>
AAA550 <2>
AAA600 <2>
200
250
300
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
52
58
77
93
102
115
135
160
180
205
220
280
330
390
440
505
550
600
220
240
320
390
420
480
560
670
750
850
920
1160
1370
1620
1830
2100
2300
2500
<1> Indicates the power of Yaskawas 4-pole motors.

<2> Under development
Class: 3 kV
Input
Voltage
(kV)
3.3
Power
Output
Supply
Voltage
Frequency (kV)
(Hz)
50/60
3.3
Model
CIMR-MV2
Nominal Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity <1>
(kW)
CCA035
CCA050
CCA070
CCA100
CCA140
CCA200
CCA260
CCA330
CCA400
CCA520
CCA650
200
285
400
570
800
1150
1500
1900
2300
3000
3700
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
132
200
315
450
630
900
1250
1500
1800
2500
3000
Receiving
<1> Indicates the capacities of Yaskawas 4-pole motors.
25

Class: 4 kV
Input
Voltage
(kV)
4.16
Power
Output
Supply
Voltage
Frequency (kV)
(Hz)
60
4.16
Model
CIMR-MV2
Motor Power <1>

(HP)
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Nominal Capacity
(kVA)
DDA052
DDA058
DDA064
DDA077
DDA093
DDA102
DDA115
DDA125
DDA155
DDA190
DDA220 <2>
DDA250 <2>
DDA285 <2>
DDA315 <2>
DDA340 <2>
DDA375 <2>
DDA440 <2>
DDA505 <2>
DDA575 <2>
DDA625 <2>
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
52
58
64
77
93
102
115
125
155
190
220
250
285
315
340
375
440
505
575
625
375
420
460
550
670
735
830
900
1120
1370
1590
1800
2050
2270
2500
2700
3170
3640
4140
4500
<1> Indicates the power of Yaskawas 4-pole motors.

Class: 6 kV
Input
Voltage
(kV)
6.6
Power
Output
Supply
Frequency Voltage
(kV)
(Hz)
50/60
6.6
Model
CIMR-MV2
Nominal Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity <1>
(kW)
FFA035
FFA050
FFA070
FFA100
FFA140
FFA200
FFA260
FFA330
FFA400
FFA520
FFA650
400
570
800
1150
1600
2300
3000
3800
4600
6000
7500
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
250
400
630
900
1250
1800
2500
3000
3600
5000
6000
26

Class: 11 kV
Input
Voltage
(kV)
11
Power
Output
Supply
Voltage
Frequency (kV)
(Hz)
50/60
11
Model
CIMR-MV2
Nominal Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity <1>
(kW)
HHA035
HHA050
HHA070
HHA100
HHA140
HHA200
HHA260 <2>
HHA330 <2>
HHA400 <2>
HHA520 <2>
HHA650 <2>
660
950
1300
1900
2650
3800
5000
6200
7600
9900
12000
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
530
760
1070
1520
2130
3050
3960
5030
6100
7930
9910
Receiving

27
Control Mode Selection

The control mode that is appropriate for your application can be selected from among the three available with the drive.
Overviews of the control modes and their features are given below.
Table 1.6 Control Modes and their Features
Motor Type
Induction Motors
Control Mode
V/f
OLV
A1-02 = 2
(Factory setting)
Open Loop Vector
control
A1-02 = 0
Basic Control
V/f control
Main
Applications
General variable
General variable speed
speed control
control, especially:
Applications that
Multi-motor
require high
applications (where
performance and
multiple motors are
advanced functions
connected to a single
without PG on the
drive)
motor side.
Remarks
CLV
A1-02 = 3
PG Option Card N/A
N/A
Closed Loop Vector

control
Ultra-highperformance control
with a PG at the motor
side
Examples:
High-accuracy
speed control
Torque control
Torque limit
PG-B3 or PG-X3
Main Control Functions
Parameter
Setting
N/A
YES
Tuning
Torque
Limit
Torque
Control
Droop
Function
Automatically adjusts the parameter settings

Line-to-line resistance Rotational, line-to-line Rotational, line-to-line
that relate to the electrical characteristics of
(normally not needed) resistance
resistance
the motor.
Sets the maximum torque for the motor to
N/A
YES
YES
protect the load and connected machinery.
Allows direct control of motor torque for
N/A
N/A
YES
tension control and other such applications.
N/A
Note the following points when using the main control functions in Table 1.6.
In cases where it is possible to separate the motor and machine during trail operation, perform rotational autotuning.
After this, the control system must be adjusted within the range where the machine doesnt vibrate. Note that rotational
autotuning can only be performed when an induction motor is run in the vector control mode.
In vector control and control of PM motors, combine only one motor with one drive. Only in the V/f control mode,
multiple motors can be controlled by a single drive. Note that, as a guide, you should select the drive capacity so that
the motor rated current is 50% to 100% of the drive rated current. When running multiple induction motors in parallel
using a single drive, the capacity of the drive should be larger than 1.1 times the total motor rated current.
When a speed estimation type speed search is performed, only one motor must be combined with one drive. In
addition, the frequency must be no greater than 120 Hz, and the motor capacity must be the same as that of the drive or
one frame lower.
28
1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check
1.3
Model Number and Nameplate Check
Check the following points after receiving the drive. If you find any problem with the drive, contact your Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office immediately.
Check the drive model to confirm that you have received the product ordered. The model information can be found in
the MODEL line on the nameplate on the inside of the control panel door.
Inspect the exterior of the drive for damage or marks. Yaskawa is not responsible for compensation if the product is
damaged during shipping. If the drive is damaged, contact the shipper immediately.
Check if the screws and fastened parts are tightened, using a screwdriver or spanner as necessary. In particular, check
the tightening torque of all terminal screws on the electrical connections.
DANGER! If any parts in the drive are damaged or missing, stop the drive and contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office. Electrical circuits could fail when current is applied, resulting in death, serious injury, or fire.
Nameplate
The nameplate is affixed on the inside of the control panel door of the drive.
An example of a nameplate with standard specifications is shown below.
Class: 2 kV
Figure 1.1
Model
Capacity
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Input frequency
Manufactured date
Serial number
/1&'.%+/4/8
2.4kV
%#2#%+6;*2
4#6'&+027681.6#)'2*#5'#%M8
4#6'&17627681.6#)'2*#5'#%M8%.#55
4#6'&176276%744'06#
4#6'&+0276(4'3'0%;*\
&#6'
5'401
/#55
Mass
-I
,#2#0
02+5
Figure 1.1 Example Drive Nameplate
Class: 3 kV
Figure 1.2
Model
Capacity
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Input frequency
Manufactured date
Serial number
/1&'.%+/4/8
M8#
%#2#%+6;
4#6'&+027681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&17627681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&176276%744'06
4#6'&+0276(4'37'0%;
&#6'
5'401
3.0kV
M8
M8%.#55
#
*\
-I
/#55
Mass
Receiving
,#2#0
Class: 4 kV
Figure 1.3
Model
Capacity
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Input frequency
Manufactured date
Serial number
/1&'.%+/4/8
4.16kV
%#2#%+6;*2
4#6'&+027681.6#)'2*#5'#%M8
4#6'&17627681.6#)'2*#5'#%M8%.#55
4#6'&176276%744'06#
4#6'&+0276(4'3'0%;*\
&#6'
5'401
/#55
Mass
-I
,#2#0
02+5
29

Class: 6 kV
Figure 1.4
Model
Capacity
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Input frequency
Manufactured date
Serial number
6.0kV
/1&'.%+/4/8
M8#
%#2#%+6;
4#6'&+027681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&17627681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&176276%744'06
4#6'&+0276(4'37'0%;
&#6'
5'401
M8
M8%.#55
#
*\
-I
/#55
Mass
,#2#0
Class: 11 kV
Figure 1.5
Model
Capacity
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
Input frequency
Manufactured date
Serial number
/1&'.%+/4/8
M8#
%#2#%+6;
4#6'&+027681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&17627681.6#)'2*#5'#%
4#6'&176276%744'06
4#6'&+0276(4'37'0%;
&#6'
5'401
11.0kV
M8
M8%.#55
#
*\
-I
/#55
Mass
,#2#0
30
Descriptions of Drive Models

Figure 1.6
CIMR-
MV2
Drive
FSDrive-MV1000 series
Input
No. Frequency
Region
Code
Standard
50 Hz
China
60 Hz
U.S.A.
No.
Input Voltage
2.4 kV
3.3 kV
4.16 kV
6.6 kV
11 kV
035
E1
A
Design revision order
A, B, C
No.
Output
No. Voltage Class
A
2.4 kV
3.3 kV
4.16 kV
6.6 kV
11 kV
Customized
No. Specifications
A Standard model
No.
Enclosure
Type
E1
IP40
3/6/11-kV Class
Output
No.
Current
035
35 A
Environmental
No. Specifications
A
Standard
2-kV Class
Output
Current
052
52 A
4-kV Class
Output
Current
052
52 A
No.
No.
050
50 A
058
58 A
058
58 A
070
70 A
077
77 A
064
64 A
100
100 A
093
93 A
077
77 A
140
140 A
102
102 A
093
93 A
200
200 A
115
115 A
102
102 A
260
260 A
135
135 A
115
115 A
330
330 A
160
160 A
125
125 A
400
400 A
180
180 A
155
155 A
520
520 A
205
205 A
190
190 A
650
650 A
220
220 A
220
220 A
280
280 A
250
250 A
330
330 A
285
285 A
390
390 A
315
315 A
440
440 A
340
340 A
505
505 A
375
375 A
550
550 A
440
440 A
600
600 A
505
505 A
575
575 A
625
625 A
Figure 1.6 Descriptions of Drive Models
Receiving
Note: All input voltages are not necessarily compatible with all output voltage classes.
31
1.4 Component Names and Configuration
1.4
Component Names and Configuration
This section covers the names and configuration of the drive components.
The external appearance of the drive and the layout of the internal devices are shown in the figures below.
Figure 1.7
2.4kV
A
A Digital Operator
Figure 1.7 External Appearance, Viewing Doors (Drive: 2-kV Class, 600 HP)
Figure 1.8
Power Cell panel
2.4kV
Control panel
A
B
$0.

%#76+10
2NGCUGFQPQVECVEJVJGHKPIGT
DGVYGGPRCPGNHNCOGCPFVJKUWPKV

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
C
%$
%$
'&
$0.
%$
4%
5%
$0.
D
E
Transformer panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
C Control circuit terminal
D Main circuit output terminals

E Main circuit input terminals
Figure 1.8 Internal Layout (Drive: 2-kV Class, 600 HP)

Figure 1.9
3.0kV
A
Power Cell panel
Transformer panel
Control panel
A Digital Operator
Figure 1.9 External Appearance, Viewing Doors (Drive: 3-kV Class, 800 kVA)
32

Figure 1.10
3.0kV
Power Cell panel

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
%$
%$
#
%$
E
Transformer panel
Control panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell

Figure 1.10 Internal Layout (Drive: 3-kV Class, 800 kVA)

Figure 1.11
4.16kV
A
A Digital Operator
Figure 1.11 External Appearance, Viewing Doors (Drive: 4-kV Class, 1000 HP)
Figure 1.12
Power Cell panel
Control panel
4.16kV
A
B
$0.

%#76+10

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
C
%$
%$
'&
$0.
%$
4%
5%
Receiving
$0.
D
E
Transformer panel
1
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell

Figure 1.12 Internal Layout (Drive: 4-kV Class, 1000 HP)
33

Figure 1.13
6.0kV
A
Transformer panel
Power Cell
panel
Control panel
A Digital Operator
Figure 1.14
6.0kV
Transformer panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
Power Cell
panel
Control panel


Figure 1.15
11.0kV
A
Transformer panel
Power Cell
panel
Control panel
A Digital Operator
34

Figure 1.16
11.0kV

%#76+10

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
%$
%$
'&
%$
4%
5%
Transformer panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
Power Cell
panel
Control panel

The drive is composed of the following three elements.

Transformer panel
Power Cell panel
Control panel
Receiving
Note: A digital operator including the functions of parameter writing/reading and status/fault monitoring, and a connector (USB) for
DriveWizard Plus MV communications are provided on the control panel door. For details on the names and functions of each
part of the digital operator controls, see Using the Digital Operator on page 107.
35
Transformer Panel
The transformer panel houses a 3-phase transformer with multiple windings on the secondary side. The secondary
winding of the transformer on the output side differs according to the input voltage as shown below.
2-kV class: Six 3-phase windings
6-kV class: Nine 3-phase windings
11-kV class: Fifteen 3-phase windings
Each of the windings is connected to a 3-phase input terminal of the Power Cell.
Multiple cooling fans for the transformer panel are mounted in the upper part of the drive panel. Cooled air taken in
through the filters on the front of the transformer panel passes the transformer panel and is expelled into the upper part of
the drive panel.
Note: Some models in which the cooled air from the fronts of both the transformer panel and Power Cell panel through the transformer
panel and is expelled into the upper part of the drive panel.
Power Cell Panel

The output side of the Power Cell Panel houses the following number of Power Cells.
2-kV class: Total of 6 cells (Two for each phase)
6-kV class: Total of 9 cells (Three for each phase)
11-kV class: Total of 9 cells (Five for each phase)
Multiple cooling fans for the Power Cell panel are mounted in the upper part of the drive panel. Cooled air taken in
through the filters on the front of the Power Cell panel passes the Power Cell fins in the cooling section, flows into the air
duct at the rear of the drive, and is expelled into the upper part of the drive panel.
Each Power Cell comprises a power section and a cell control board (abbreviated to CCB). Each CCB is connected to the
controller in the control panel with an optical fiber cable. The CCB controls PWM output of the Power Cell according to
the references sent from the controller through the optical fiber cable. The CCB has protection functions against
overvoltage, undervoltage, IGBT overheat and other problems, and sends feedback to the controller through the optical
fiber cable.
Control Panel
The control panel houses the following devices.
All external cables except the input and output cables of the main circuit are connected to the control circuit terminal
block.
36
Controller and control power supply to control the drive

MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker)
Sequence I/O relay
Peripheral circuits such as an isolation amplifier for analog I/O
Control circuit terminal block
Note: A 200/220-Vac power supply is required as the power source for the cooling fan and control circuit. (A 380/400/440-Vac power
supply is available as an option.)

Boards Comprising the Controller
The controller comprises the multiple boards listed below.
Control board
Isolation board
Current detection resistance board
Interface board with optical fiber (only for 11-kV class drives)
Power Supply to the Controller

The following three types of power supplies are used with the controller.
Refer to Spare Parts on page 202 for the power supply model.
Receiving
5 V: Control circuit power supply

15 V: Analog I/O power supply
24 V: Sequence I/O power supply
37
38
2
This chapter describes the correct installation environment for the drive, the space required to
mount it, the types of dimension drawings and other matters.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STORING DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
41
65
70
39
2.1 Section Safety
2.1
Section Safety
DANGER
Crush Hazard
When the drive is moved using a crane, it must be done by a qualified crane operator.
Improper use of the crane could result in the drive falling, causing death or injury.
When a lifter is used to load or remove Power Cells, the dedicated lifter must be used.
Failure to comply could result in a Power Cell falling, causing death or injury.
Do not remove bolts from the top of the transformer panel and fit hoisting tackle to lift it.
Failure to comply could result in deformation or falling of the transformer panel.

When lifting the transformer panel, take care to ensure that the housing is not damaged by contact with the ceiling
plate or other parts.
Failure to comply could result in deformation of the transformer panel or damage to the ceiling plate.
NOTICE
Never install ducts in the air exhaust system.
Making modifications, such as connecting air exhaust ducts to the exterior of the drive panels cooling fan, could
reduce the cooling airflow and result in an abnormal rise in temperature or drive failure. Do not use air exhaust ducts.
Take measures to prevent salt-bearing atmospheric air, rain and dust getting into the switch room.
Insulation is impaired and metals are corroded by absorption of moisture and salt damage, and this can cause the drive
to malfunction.
Also install an air conditioner or ventilation system with sufficient capacity to prevent all potential damage to the drive
and the other devices in the switch room, and maintain an ambient temperature of no higher than 40C and a humidity
of no greater than 85% (Yaskawa recommends the installation of an air conditioner).
Observe the following precautions when installing the drive panel.
When installing the panel take care to prevent metal chips from drilling, oil, water, from and so on getting stuck to the
drive or inside it. And when the installation work is completed, check thoroughly to ensure that no tools or unused
parts have been left inside the panel, and that there are no foreign objects or obstructions on or around parts where
power flows, at the air filters, or on the ventilation louver on the top of the drive. Failure to comply could result in
damage to the panel.
When using rollers to move the drive panel, make sure that the following conditions are met.
Improper handling could result in damage to the panel.

Place the panel on the rollers while adjusting their positions so that they extend approximately 100 mm each side of the
panels frame.
Distribute the weight of the drive evenly on the rollers so stress is evenly distributed on the bottom of the drive.
Create a smooth, even surface for rolling by laying boards flat on the floor. Use boards with sufficient strength and
durability, and make sure the boards do not have gaps between them.
When bolting frames to each other, make secure connections by using the tightening torque indicated in this manual.
Any space between two frames may cause a leakage of cooling air, resulting in the drive failure.
When storing the drive, be sure to observe the precautions explained in Storing Drives on page 70.
An incorrect storage method could result in damage to, or failure of, the drive.
Before turning on the power to the drive after a long period in storage, carefully check for moisture and dust.
Failure to comply could result in damage by fire or other damage.
40
2.2 Mechanical Installation
2.2
Installation Environment
The installation environment plays an important part in obtaining the optimum performance from the drive and in
maintaining its functions over the long term. Install the drive in an environment matching the following specifications.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment
Environment
Installation Area
Enclosure Type
Conditions
Indoors
IP40 (simplified dustproof type)
5C to +40C
Note: If the ambient temperature changes greatly, condensation may occur. When installing the drive in
Ambient
such an environment, take measures to prevent condensation, such as installing a space heater
Temperature
inside the drive. If a space heater is required, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office in advance.
Relative Humidity 85%RH max. (no condensing)
20C to +60C (for very short term when handling)
Storage
Note: When storing the drive for a long time without supplying power to it, refer to Storing Drives on
Temperature
page 70.
Location free from oil mist, corrosive gases/liquids, combustible gases, dust, etc.
Location free from radioactive and combustible materials
Atmosphere
Location low in chlorides
Location with no exposure to direct sunlight
Altitude
2000 m max.
Pollution Degree Level 2 or lower
NOTICE: Never install ducts in the air exhaust system. Making modifications, such as connecting air exhaust ducts to the exterior of
the drive panel's cooling fan, could reduce the cooling airflow and result in an abnormal rise in temperature or drive failure.
Do not use air exhaust ducts.
NOTICE: Take measures to prevent salt-bearing atmospheric air, rain, and dust getting into the switch room. Insulation is impaired and
metals are corroded by absorption of moisture and salt damage, and this can cause the drive to malfunction. Also install an
air conditioner or ventilation system with sufficient capacity to prevent all potential damage to the drive and the other devices
in the switch room, and maintain an ambient temperature of no higher than 40?C and a humidity of no greater than 85%
(Yaskawa recommends the installation of an air conditioner).
NOTICE: Observe the following precautions when installing the drive.
When installing the drive take care to prevent metal chips from drilling, oil, water, from and so on getting stuck to the drive or
inside it. And when the installation work is completed, check thoroughly to ensure that no tools or unused parts have been
left inside the panel, and that there are no foreign objects or obstructions on or around parts where power flows, at the air
filters, or on the ventilation louver on the top of the drive. Failure to comply could result in damage to the panel.
Mechanical
Installation
Note: 1. Operate the drive with the fan cover on top of the panel mounted. If the installation space is limited and the fan cover needs to be
removed, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office in advance.
2. If the drive has to be installed in a location subject to a high level of vibration caused by machines such as cranes, contact your
Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office in advance. The drive generates noise, including radio noise, to some
extent. This should be considered when selecting the installation location.
3. Please comply with the law of the relevant country when you install the drive panel. For details, contact your Yaskawa representative.
41
Checking the Installation Space

Secure the space indicated below around the drive to maintain sufficient cooling.
Note: If the installation space for the drive is restricted and the space indicated below cannot be secured, contact your Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
Figure 2.1
Rear
D
Front
C
Door opening dimension

E
Front views
A Min. 1000 mm
B Min. 30 mm
C Min. 2000 mm
Side view
D Min. 600 mm
E Max. 800 mm
Figure 2.1 Drive Installation Space
Table 2.2 Precautions on Installation Space

Installation
Space
A (Top)
B (Sides)
C (Front)
D (Rear)
42
Details
Sufficient space to remove the cooling fans from the top of the drive is required for fan replacement. Air is expelled
through the cooling fans on top of the drive. If the cooling fans are too close to the ceiling, the air that has been expelled
may be drawn back into the drive, reducing the cooling performance.
Sufficient space is required to allow Power Cells to be drawn out and placed on the lifter used to convey them when
Power Cells need to be replaced.
Sufficient working space is required to route the cables and to install anchors on the back of the drive.
Transporting
The method of transport differs depending on the model of drive.
Transport the drive by using the appropriate method indicated in the table below.
Table 2.3 Models and Transportation Methods
Nominal
Capacity
(kVA)
Motor Power
(HP)
220 to 560
200 to 600
670 to 1620
2
1830 to 2500
700 to 1750
<1>
2000 to 2750
<1>
200 to 800
132 to 630
1150 to 2300
900 to 1800
3000 to 3700
2500 to 3000
375 to 900
400 to 1000
1120 to 2700
4
3170 to 4500
1250 to 3000
<1>
3500 to 5000
<1>
400 to 2300
250 to 1800
3000 to 7500
2500 to 6000
660 to 3800
530 to 3050
11
5000 to 12000
<1>
3960 to 9910
Transportation Method
Use the support hooks on the top of the drive to lift the drive.
For details on the transportation procedure, refer to Table 2.4.
Use the support hooks to lift the transformer panel.
Use the support hooks on the top of the drive to lift the Power Cell and control panels.
Mechanical
Installation
Voltage
Class
(kV)
<1> The following models are under development.

2-kV class: 700 to 1750 HP, 2000 to 2750 HP
4-kV class: 1750 to 3000 HP, 3500 to 5000 HP
11-kV class: 5000 to 12000 kVA
43

When using rollers to move the drive panel, make sure that the following conditions are met. Improper handling could
result in damage to the drive.
Place the panel on the rollers while adjusting their positions so that they extend approximately 100 mm each side of the
panels frame.
Distribute the weight of the drive evenly on the rollers so stress is evenly distributed on the bottom of the drive.
Create a smooth, even surface for rolling by laying boards flat on the floor. Use boards with sufficient strength and
durability, and make sure the boards do not have gaps between them.
Table 2.4 Transportation Procedure 1 (Class: 2 kV)
Transportation Procedure
1. Attach the wire ropes for lifting to the support hooks on the top of the panel to lift the drive.
Figure 2.2
Wire ropes for lifting

Hanging angle of 60 max.
Top view
Drive
Front view
Figure 2.2 Inserting Wire Ropes for Lifting
2. Ensure that the hanging angle is no greater than 60.
44

1. Insert wire ropes for lifting through the support hook installation openings on the top of the drive.
Note: Drives are shipped with the support hook installation openings fitted.
Figure 2.3
Support hook
installation opening
Drive
Top view
Front view
2. Attach the wire ropes for lifting to the support hooks on the transformer to lift the transformer panel.
Figure 2.4
Transformer
support hooks
Front view
Figure 2.4 Lifting the Transformer Panel
DANGER! Do not remove bolts from the top of the transformer panel and fit hoisting tackle to lift it. Failure to comply could result in
deformation or falling of the transformer panel.
DANGER! When lifting the transformer panel, take care to ensure that the housing is not damaged by contact with the ceiling plate
or other parts. Failure to comply could result in deformation of the transformer panel or damage to the ceiling plate.
45
Mechanical
Installation

Figure 2.5

Hanging angle
of 60 max.
Support hooks
(4 pieces)
Support hook
Top view

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
Pass the wire rope

through the support
hook while lifting it.
%$
%$
%$
Drive
Front view
46

Figure 2.6
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.7
Hanging angle
of 60 max.
Mechanical
Installation
Transformer
support hooks
Front view

47

Figure 2.8
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.9
Transformer
support hooks
Front view

48

Figure 2.10

Top view
Drive
Front view
Mechanical
Installation
49

Figure 2.11
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.12
Transformer
support hooks
Front view

50

Figure 2.13
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Mechanical
Installation
51

Figure 2.14
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.15
Hanging angle
of 60 max.
Transformer
support hooks
Front view

52

Figure 2.16
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.17
Transformer
support hooks
Front view
53
Mechanical
Installation

Figure 2.18
Top view
Drive
Front view
Figure 2.18
Inserting Wire Ropes for Lifting
54

Figure 2.19
Support hook
Drive
Top view
Front view
Figure 2.20
Hanging angle
of 60 max.
Mechanical
Installation
Transformer
support hooks
Front view

55
Side-by-Side Installation
Side-by-side installation means a configuration in which a transformer panel, Power Cell panel and control panel
delivered as separate units are installed within one panel or by wiring between panels.
The following models are installed side by side in a block construction (Table 2.10).
2-kV class: 700 to 2750 HP
3-kV class: 1150 to 3700 kVA
4-kV class: 1250 to 5000 HP
6-kV class: All models
11-kV class: All models
Note: Models other than those indicated above are delivered with the transformer panel, Power Cell panel and control panel integrated
within a single frame.
On these models, eight holes are provided each on the transformer panel frame and Power Cell panel frame (refer to the
figure below).
Use M10 30L bolts, washers, S-washers, and nuts to join the sections.
Figure 2.21
2.4kV
Transformer panel frame
Power Cell panel frame
Arrows: Positions of bolts
Figure 2.21 Mounting Holes for Side-by-Side Installation (Drive: 2-kV Class, 700 HP)
Figure 2.22
3.0kV
Figure 2.22 Mounting Holes for Side-by-Side Installation (Drive: 3-kV Class, 1150 kVA)
56

Figure 2.23
4.16kV
Figure 2.23 Mounting Holes for Side-by-Side Installation (Drive: 4-kV Class, 1250 HP)
Figure 2.24
6.0kV
Figure 2.25
Mechanical
Installation
11.0kV
57

When installing side by side a drive in a block construction, ensure that the specifications indicated in the table below are
satisfied.
Table 2.16 Side-by-Side Configuration
Category
Specifications
Bolts between Panel Tightening torque of M10 bolts provided as accessories: 18 to 23 Nxm (lb.in.)
Perform the following wiring between panels.
Main circuit wiring
Wiring between
Panel
Grounding bus bars
Cooling fan wiring
Installation
Use a measuring instrument such as a theodolite to measure the levelness on the installation base at 1-meter
Accuracy of Drive
intervals, and adjust to achieve a levelness error of within 2 mm.
Panels
NOTICE: When bolting frames to each other, make secure connections by using the tightening torque indicated in this manual. Any
space between two frames may cause a leakage of cooling air, resulting in drive failure.
58
Installing Cooling Exhaust Covers

Cooling exhaust covers to be fitted at the top of the drive are delivered as accessories.
Install the cooling exhaust covers provided as accessories after installing the drive.
Bolts for securing the cooling exhaust covers are provisionally set in the drive where the covers are to be installed.
Remove these bolts and install the cooling exhaust covers with them.
The number of locations where the cooling exhaust covers should be installed differs depending on the model of the
drive.
When transporting the drive or installing the cooling exhaust covers, be careful not to damage the cooling fans.
Installing a Drive on a Floor

The table below shows the dimensions and the number of mounting holes for each input voltage when installing a drive
on a floor.
Use mounting bolts and nuts of M12 diameter to secure the drive.
Even in normal installation environments where there is no vibration, secure the drive with bolts in all the designated
holes.
Table 2.17 Drive Installation Dimensions, and Sizes and Numbers of Mounting Holes
Model
CIMR-MV2
A6AA052
A6AA058
A6AA077
A6AA093
A6AA102
A6AA115
A6AA135
A6AA160
A6AA180
A6AA205 <2>
A6AA220 <2>
A6AA280 <2>
A6AA330 <2>
A6AA390 <2>
A6AA440 <2>
A6AA505 <2>
A6AA550 <2>
A6AA600 <2>
CCA035
CCA050
CCA070
CCA100
CCA140
CCA200 <1>
CCA260 <1>
CCA330 <1>
CCA400 <1>
CCA520 <1>
CCA650 <1>
Bottom
Dimension
Drawing
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.27
Figure 2.28
Figure 2.28
Figure 2.29
Figure 2.29
Figure 2.29
Figure 2.29
Figure 2.29
Figure 2.30
Figure 2.30
Figure 2.30
Figure 2.30
Figure 2.31
Figure 2.31
Installation Dimensions (mm)

W1
W2
W3
Mounting Holes
N - (mm)
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
730
730
855
855
855
855
855
1260
1360
1360
1360
980
1130
780
780
855
855
855
855
855
1260
1660
2260
2260
1430
1430
980
980
980
980
980
980
980
1220
1220
930
930
930
930
930
1030
1130
1530
1530
1530
1530
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
12 - 17
12 - 17
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
12-17
12-17
Mechanical
Installation
Voltage
Class
(kV)
59

Voltage
Class
(kV)
Model
CIMR-MV2
DDA052
DDA058
DDA064
DDA077
DDA093
DDA102
DDA115
DDA125
DDA155 <1>
DDA190 <1>
DDA220 <1> <2>
DDA250 <1> <2>
DDA285 <1> <2>
DDA315 <1> <2>
DDA340 <1> <2>
DDA375 <1> <2>
DDA440 <1> <2>
DDA505 <1> <2>
DDA575 <1> <2>
11
DDA625 <1> <2>

FFA035 <1>
FFA050 <1>
FFA070 <1>
FFA100 <1>
FFA140 <1>
FFA200 <1>
FFA260 <1>
FFA330 <1>
FFA400 <1>
FFA520 <1>
FFA650 <1>
HHA035 <1>
HHA050 <1>
HHA070 <1>
HHA100 <1>
HHA140 <1>
HHA200 <1>
HHA260 <1> <2>
HHA330 <1> <2>
HHA400 <1> <2>
HHA520 <1> <2>
HHA650 <1> <2>
Bottom
Dimension
Drawing
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.32
Figure 2.33
Figure 2.33
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.34
Figure 2.35
Figure 2.35
Figure 2.35
Figure 2.35
Figure 2.36
Figure 2.36
Figure 2.36
Figure 2.36
Figure 2.36
Figure 2.37
Installation Dimensions (mm)

W1
W2
W3
Mounting Holes
N - (mm)
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
730
730
1360
1360
1360
1360
1360
1660
2160
1180
1180
1280
1380
1760
1760
1760
1760
1760
1180
800
800
1260
1260
1260
1260
1260
2360
2860
1760
1760
2160
2160
1430
1430
1430
1430
1430
2160
1460
1460
1660
1660
1660
980
980
980
980
980
980
980
980
1200
1200
1030
1030
1030
1030
1030
1230
1230
1530
1530
1530
1530
1330
1330
1330
1330
1330
1470
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
6 - 17
12 - 17
12 - 17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
14-17
14-17
14-17
14-17
10-17
10-17
10-17
10-17
10-17
14-17
<1> Side-by-side configurations comprising two or more drive panels

60

Example Drive Installation
Use a taper washer for the channel contact surface.
Figure 2.26
M12 bolt, nut, washer, and S-washer <1>
Taper washer for M12 bolt <1>
FL
17
<1> To be prepared by the customer.
Figure 2.26 Channel Contact Face

Figure 2.27
20
6-17
2.4kV
Cable inlet
20
W1
120
W1
120
Front: with the door removed
Figure 2.27 Dimension Drawing 1 for Bottom (Class: 2 kV)

Figure 2.28
8-17
20
2.4kV
Cable inlet
240
W2
120
Mechanical
Installation
W1
20
120
61

Figure 2.29
6-17
3.0kV
20
Cable inlet
20
120
W1
W2
120

Figure 2.30
Cable inlet
W1
120
240
W2
120
20
20
12-17
3.0kV

Figure 2.31
12-17
20
3.0kV
120
W1
W1
240
W2
W2
120
20
Cable inlet
62

Figure 2.32
20
6-17
4.16kV
Cable inlet
20
W1
120
W1
120

Figure 2.33
8-17
20
4.16kV
Cable inlet
W1
120
240
W2
120
20

Figure 2.34
8-17
20
6.0kV
Cable inlet
W1
240
W2
120
20
120
14-17
20
6.0kV
Mechanical
Installation
Figure 2.35
Cable inlet
W1
W1
240
W2
240
W3
120
20
120
63

Figure 2.36
10-17
20
11.0kV
Cable inlet
120
W1
240
W2
W2
20
120

Figure 2.37
14-17
20
11.0kV
Cable inlet
W1
W1
240
W2
240
W3
20
120
120
64
2.3 Dimensions
2.3
Dimensions
The FSDrive-MV1000 series dimensions and approximate masses are shown below.
Table 2.18 Drive Dimensions and Approximate Masses
Voltage
Class
(kV)
A6AA052
A6AA058
A6AA077
A6AA093
A6AA102
A6AA115
A6AA135
A6AA160 <1>
A6AA180 <1>
A6AA205 <2>
A6AA220 <2>
A6AA280 <2>
A6AA330 <2>
A6AA390 <2>
A6AA440 <2>
A6AA505 <2>
A6AA550 <2>
A6AA600 <2>
CCA035
CCA050
CCA070
CCA100
CCA140
CCA200 <1>
CCA260 <1>
CCA330 <1>
CCA400 <1>
CCA520 <1>
CCA650 <1>
Dimension
Drawing
No.
Width
Figure 2.38
Figure 2.39
Figure 2.40
Figure 2.41
Dimensions (mm)
Depth
Height
Height
Height
H1
H2
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
3500
3500
1950
1950
1950
1950
1950
3000
3500
4100
4100
5300
5600
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1270
1270
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1100
1200
1600
1600
1600
1600
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2500
2500
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2800
2800
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2100
2100
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2400
2400
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Approx. Mass
(kg) <3> <2>
2400
2400
2600
2600
2600
2800
2800
6000
6000
2100
2200
2400
2600
2800
4100
5500
7000
7400
8800
9900
Mechanical
Installation
Model
CIMR-MV2
65
2.3 Dimensions
Voltage
Class
(kV)
11
Model
CIMR-MV2
DDA052
DDA058
DDA064
DDA077
DDA093
DDA102
DDA115
DDA125
DDA155 <1>
DDA190 <1>
DDA220 <2>
DDA250 <2>
DDA285 <2>
DDA315 <2>
DDA340 <2>
DDA375 <2>
DDA440 <2>
DDA505 <2>
DDA575 <2>
DDA625 <2>
FFA035 <1>
FFA050 <1>
FFA070 <1>
FFA100 <1>
FFA140 <1>
FFA200 <1>
FFA260 <1>
FFA330 <1>
FFA400 <1>
FFA520 <1>
FFA650 <1>
HHA035 <1>
HHA050 <1>
HHA070 <1>
HHA100 <1>
HHA140 <1>
HHA200 <1>
HHA260 <1> <2>
HHA330 <1> <2>
HHA400 <1> <2>
HHA520 <1> <2>
HHA650 <1> <2>
Dimension
Drawing
No.
Figure 2.42
Figure 2.43
Figure 2.44
Figure 2.45
Width
Dimensions (mm)
Depth
Height
Height
Height
H1
H2
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
1680
3500
3500
3100
3100
3100
3100
3100
4500
5500
6300
6300
7100
7300
5100
5100
5100
5100
5100
6900
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1270
1270
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1300
1300
1600
1600
1600
1600
1400
1400
1400
1400
1400
1500
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2800
2500
2500
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2800
2800
2900
2900
2700
2700
2700
2700
2700
2700
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2550
2100
2100
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2150
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
500
500
300
300
300
300
300
300
Approx. Mass
(kg) <3> <2>
2400
2400
2400
2600
2600
2600
2800
2800
6000
6000
3000
3300
3600
3900
4200
6600
8000
10100
11000
14500
17000
7600
7800
8000
8200
8400
10000
<1> Side-by-side configurations comprising two or more drive panels

<3> The dimensions and masses may be changed.
66
2.3 Dimensions
H1
H2
Figure 2.38
Max.
800 mm
2.4kV
Door opening
dimension
Figure 2.38 Dimension Drawing 1 (Class: 2 kV)
H1
H2
Figure 2.39
Max.
850 mm
2.4kV
Door opening
dimension

Figure 2.40
Mechanical
Installation
H1
H2
3.0kV
2
W
Max.
800 mm
Door opening
dimension
67
2.3 Dimensions
Figure 2.41
H1
H2
3.0kV
Max.
800 mm
Door opening
dimension

Figure 2.42
H1
H2
4.16kV
Max.
800 mm
Door opening
dimension

Figure 2.43
H1
H2
4.16kV
Max.
850 mm
Door opening
dimension
68
2.3 Dimensions
Figure 2.44
H1
H2
6.0kV
Max.
800 mm
Door opening
dimension
Figure 2.44 Dimension Drawing (Class: 6 kV)

Figure 2.45
H1
H2
11.0kV
Max.
800 mm
Door opening
dimension
Mechanical
Installation
Figure 2.45 Dimension Drawing (Class: 11 kV)
69
2.4 Storing Drives
2.4
Storing Drives
When storing a drive in a warehouse or keeping an installed drive without the power being supplied, observe the
following precautions to secure its reliability.
NOTICE: When storing the drive, be sure to observe the precautions explained in this section. An incorrect storage method could
result in damage to, or failure of, the drive.
Short Term Storage of Drives

Conditions
Storage of up to one month after unpacking or up to three months after shipping.
Surrounding Environment
Secure a storage environment that satisfies the conditions cited for the drives environmental specification refer to
Installation Environment on page 41.
Note that an ambient temperature of up to 60C is acceptable.
Long Term Storage of Drives

Conditions
Storage of more than one month after unpacking or more than three months after shipping.
Note: Contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office in advance if long term storage is required.
Surrounding Environment
Secure a storage environment that satisfies the conditions cited for the drives environmental specification refer to
Installation Environment on page 41.
Note that an ambient temperature of up to 50C is acceptable.
Store the spare parts without unpacking them. For details on the storage method, refer to Storing Spare Parts on
page 205.
Preparing a Drive for Storage
Storing an Installed Drive
To protect it from dust and water droplets, cover the whole drive with two layers of sheeting. The sheet should be at
least 0.1 mm thick.
Completely seal the bottom of the drive with sealant to prevent moisture and dust from entering the drive.
Protect every corner of the drive with shock-absorbing materials to prevent the sheet getting broken.
Storage in a Warehouse
Before storing the drive for a long period in a warehouse, carefully read Figure 2.46 and the following precautions.
To protect it from dust and water droplets, cover the whole drive with two layers of sheeting. The sheet should be at
least 0.1 mm thick.
Protect every corner of the drive with shock-absorbing materials to prevent the sheet getting broken.
Roll in the sheet under the bottom of the drive so that the drive will not absorb moisture from the floor.
Do not rest the drive directly on the floor but on 50 to 100 mm square timbers.
Place the timbers as shown in Figure 2.46 so that the whole bottom of the drive is evenly loaded.
Place the drive in the orientation indicated in the dimension drawings. Do not place it on its side or stack drives.
Adopt measures to prevent the drive getting scratched or damaged by external impacts.
Insert the silica gel into any drive openings to absorb moisture. As a guide to the appropriate quantity, use 1 kg per
cubic meter.
Replace the silica gel every three months. Note, however, that the period the silica gel remains effective differs
depending on the ambient humidity.
Provide supports or devise other measures to prevent the drive falling down.
The drive is not suited to storage outside a warehouse.
70
2.4 Storing Drives

Figure 2.46
Sheet (Use two layers of sheeting at least 0.1 mm thick.)

Shock-absorbing material
Shock-absorbing material
Drive side face
Front of drive
Square
timbers
50 to 100 mm
Square
timbers
Floor
Figure 2.46 Preparing a Drive for Storage
Other Precautions
Devise measures to prevent the in-panel wiring and cables being damaged by rats or other possible causes.
Periodic Inspection
Inspect the following points every month.
The color of the silica gel has changed, indicating that moisture was absorbed.
(Use the type of silica gel that changes color and check absorbency based on the degree of color change.)
The drive is not wet due to humidity or roof leaks.
The drive is neither corroded nor rusted (both the interior and exterior).
Mechanical
Installation
NOTICE: Before turning on the power to the drive after a long period in storage, carefully check for moisture and dust.
Failure to comply could result in damage by fire or other damage.
71
2.4 Storing Drives
72
3
This chapter describes the main circuit terminals, control circuit terminals, wiring
specifications, and notes on connections.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
SAFETY MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ROUTING CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CONNECTING TO A PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
EXTERNAL INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
WIRING CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
73
3.1 Safety Messages
3.1
Safety Messages
DANGER


Do not touch the input and output terminals directly with your hands and do not bring the input and output wires into
contact with the drive case or metal parts. In addition, do not short circuit the output wires.
Failure to comply could result in death, serious injury, or ground fault.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard

After an emergency stop circuit has been wired, check to make sure that it is operating properly. Emergency stop
circuits are needed to safely and quickly stop the operation of the drive.
Operating a drive with an emergency stop circuit whose operation has not been checked could result in death or serious
injury.
Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting the test run.
Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.

Do not supply power to the main circuit while the panel doors are open.

The diagrams in this section may show the drive without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall
covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
Always ground the motor-side ground terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death, serious injury, or fire by contacting the motor case.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without eye protection.

Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning
work on the drive.

Turn off the power for the main circuit and controls to all devices before connecting the drives terminals.
internal capacitors to discharge. Wait until the CHARGE LED goes off before starting inspection. While an electric
charge remains in the capacitor, the surface and inside of the Power Cell will carry a high voltage, so there will be a
risk of death or serious injury.
Use a ground wire of a gauge that complies with the technical standards for electrical equipment in the country where
the drive is being used. Keep the wiring as short as possible.
Improper equipment grounding could cause leakage current to flow to the drive. If so, the potential of the drives
ground terminals becomes unstable at some distance from the grounding point, resulting in death or serious injury.
74
3.1 Safety Messages
WARNING
Always ground the ground terminals. Also be sure to carry out the following grounding work.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by an electric shock through contact with
ungrounded electrical equipment.
Ground terminals (EA):
grounding resistance of 10 or less
Control circuits (200 V or less): grounding resistance of 100 or less
Do not touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.
Do not use an improper voltage source.

NOTICE

Use only shielded cable to wire analog input/output signals for the control circuit.
Failure to comply could result in drive malfunction.

Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Be careful not to create a short circuit between the analog output terminals.
Failure to comply could cause the drive malfunction.

Do not ground to terminals other than the designated grounding terminals.
Failure to comply could cause the drive to malfunction.

Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the drive made by the user.
Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure that all connections are correct.
Consider voltage tolerance levels and insulation in applications with a high input voltage or particularly long wiring
distances. Contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
The analog output terminals are for monitoring output frequency and current. These terminals are not used for controls
such as feedback control. Be careful not to create a short circuit between analog output terminals.

Keep the wiring for the main circuit separate from that for the control circuit.

Select a power supply with a capacity larger than that of the drive to be connected.
When connecting multiple drives to a single power supply, select a power supply with a capacity larger than the sum of
the power required by all the drives to be connected. Even when the power supply has sufficient capacity, the power
supply voltage may drop when the power is turned on, causing malfunction of connected devices if the power supply
has a large power impedance.
75
3.1 Safety Messages
NOTICE
The area where the cables enter the bottom of the drive should be tightly sealed with fire-resistant putty so that no
open space remains. Make sure the entire peripheral areas around the channel base and the pit cover are tightly
sealed with the putty so that no opening remains.
A proper operating environment cannot be maintained if air or dust from the outside makes its way into the drive, and
can result in damage to the equipment.
Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time.
Improper wiring could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
Do not short circuit the drive output terminals or connect the power supply lines to output terminals U, V and W of the
drive.
Incorrect wiring can result in damage to the drive. Carry out wiring that conforms to the wire gauges and tightening
torques described in this manual. Conduct a thorough check of wiring and sequences before turning the power on.
Select a breaker with sufficient capacity for the main circuit power supply side of the drive, taking the inrush current
from the transformer into account.
Inputs and outputs of the drive (main circuit) contain harmonic components that may adversely affect communication
devices, such as AM radios, used in the vicinity. Use high-voltage cables and ground any shielded cables. Separate
cables for control from high-current circuits (main circuit and relay sequence circuits) to avoid induction from
peripheral devices. (It is advisable to separate them by a distance of 30 cm or more.)
Connect input terminals U, V and W of the motor to output terminals U, V and W of the drive, pairing the terminal
codes. The phase orders of the motor terminals and drive terminals should also match.
The motor may run in reverse if the phase orders do not match.
Do not connect the AC power line to the output terminals of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage.
Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment.
Improper grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction.

When using more than one drive, follow the instructions in this manual and ensure that the ground wires do not form a
loop.

When wiring the control circuit, separate it from the main circuit wiring (terminals R, S, T, U, V and W) and other power
lines.
Improper grounding could result in drive malfunction.

Insulate the shielded wires of the drive, e.g. with tape, to prevent their contact with other signal lines or devices.
Failure to comply could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
76
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
3.2
Standard Connection Diagram
The standard connection diagram for the drive is shown below. For the operating method, see Start-Up Programming &
Operation on page 105.
NOTICE: Consider voltage tolerance levels and insulation in applications with a high input voltage or particularly long wiring distances.
Contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
Class: 2 kV
Figure 3.1
Main circuit input

terminals
Main circuit output

terminals
R
S
T
U
V
W
Grounding of the
main circuit
terminal EA
(Option)
2.4kV
Ground resistance:
less than 10
Control power supply

terminals
Control power supply,
AC single-phase R
200/220 V
S
50/60 Hz
Cooling fan power supply

Controller power supply
ISO
AMP
RC
SC
CN4-2
Ground resistance:
less than 100
CN4-1
Output
voltage
RS-232
Current detection
resistance board
13
14
DI
1
2
3
6
7
External fault
reset
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
CN14-4
Reserved
Relay board
CN14-3
CN14-2
I/O
Reserved
10
Sequence output
terminals
Major fault
30
Output
(transfer
contact)
31
34
CN12-1
38
37
39
Minor fault
40
Medium-voltage
power shutdown
command
41
L47
L48
AO_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L4
L5
L6
AO_2
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L7
L8
L9
Terminals for inrush current

suppression circuit (option)
MC ON
MC ANS
Analog output
terminals
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC
215IF
or
218IF
(Ethernet)
35
36
Drive ready
26
27
28
Expansion PLC
board (option)
32
33
During run
CN14-1
Operation interlock
DriveWizard Plus MV
From expansion PLC board
Analog output: 4 points

-10 V to +10 V
CN11-1
RS-232
Relay circuit
Medium-voltage
primary panel on
USB
DO
Digital input: 8 points
USB copy unit (option)
Panel board
(Option)
200/220 Vac
15
1
2
3
RS-485
RJ-45
CN9
1
2
3
Relay circuit
Run
command
AI_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
USB
Analog input: 2 points

-10 V to +10 V
RJ-45
CN10-3
Sequence input
terminals
L1
L2
L3
CN13-2
Frequency reference
4 to 20 mA DC
CN13-1
Analog input terminals
Stop
command
CN21, 22
Input voltage Input current
CN10-1 CN10-2
Grounding of the
control system
terminal ED
Digital operator
ISO
AMP
RS-232
To panel board
I/O or communication
board (option)
42
Line driver PG board

(option)
Digital output: 8 points
Relay circuit
Main circuit power supply,

AC 3-phase
R
2.4 kV
S
60 Hz
Either one or two boards can be

installed by setting parameter.
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Line driver
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
CN11-2
Relay
board
(option)
3
CN12-2
Complementary PG
board (option)
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Complementary
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (Example: CIMR-MV2A6AA052)
77
Class: 3 kV
Figure 3.2
Main circuit input

terminals
AC 3-phase
R
3.0/3.3 kV
S
50/60 Hz
Main circuit output

terminals
R
S
T
U
V
W
Grounding of the
main circuit
terminal EA
3.0kV
(Option)
Ground resistance:
less than 10

terminals
AC single-phase R
200/220 V
50/60 Hz

ISO
AMP
RC
SC
CN4-2
Ground resistance:
less than 100
Current detection
Resistance board
L1
L2
L3
AI_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
CN13-2
13
14
15
DI
1
2
3
Reserved
6
8
1
2
3
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
10
Sequence output
terminals
Major fault
30
Output
(transfer
contact)
31
34
CN12-1
38
37
39
Minor fault
40
Medium-voltage
Power shutdown
Command
41
ISO
AMP
L4
L5
L6
AO_2
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L7
L8
L9
MC ANS
Analog output
terminals
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC
215IF
or
218IF
(Ethernet)
35
36
Drive ready
AO_1
GND
FG
MC ON
Expansion PLC
board (option)
32
33
During run
L47
L48

CN14-4
(Option)
Reserved
26
27
28
CN14-3
External fault
reset
Relay board
CN14-2
I/O
CN14-1
Operation interlock
DriveWizard Plus MV

-10 V to +10 V
CN11-1
RS-232
Relay circuit
Medium-voltage
Primary panel on
USB
DO
Panel board
(Option)
200/220 Vac
Relay circuit
Run
command
1
2
3
RS-485
RJ-45
CN9
Sequence input
terminals
1
2
3
USB

-10 V to +10 V
RJ-45
CN10-3
Frequency reference
4 to 20 mA DC
CN13-1
Stop
command
CN4-1
Output
voltage
RS-232
CN21, 22
CN10-1 CN10-2
Grounding of the
control system
terminal ED
Digital operator
ISO
AMP
RS-232
To panel board
board (option)
42

(option)
Relay circuit

L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Line driver
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
CN11-2
Relay
board
(option)

CN12-2
Complementary PG
board (option)
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A dignal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Complementary
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
Figure 3.2 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (Example: CIMR-MV2C5CA035)
78
Class: 4 kV
Figure 3.3
Main circuit input

terminals
AC 3-phase
R
4.16 kV
S
60 Hz
Main circuit output

terminals
R
S
T
U
V
W
Grounding of the
main circuit
terminal EA
4.16kV
(Option)
Ground resistance:
less than 10

terminals
AC single-phase R
200/220 V
S
50/60 Hz

ISO
AMP
RC
SC
CN4-2
CN4-1
Output
voltage
RS-232
Current detection
resistance board
AI_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
CN13-2
13
14
DI
1
2
3
6
8
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
10
Sequence output
terminals
30
Output
(transfer
contact)
31
35
34
CN12-1
36
Drive ready
38
37
39
Minor fault
40
Medium-voltage
power shutdown
command
41
AO_2
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L7
L8
L9
Analog output
terminals
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC
215IF
or
218IF
(Ethernet)
33
During run
ISO
AMP
L4
L5
L6
MC ANS
Expansion PLC
board (option)
32
Major fault
AO_1
GND
FG
MC ON
CN14-4
(Option)
Reserved
L47
L48

CN14-3
External fault
reset
Relay board
Reserved
1
2
3
CN14-2
I/O
CN14-1
Operation interlock
26
27
28

-10 V to +10 V
CN11-1
DriveWizard Plus MV
Relay circuit
Medium-voltage
primary panel on
RS-232
DO
USB
(Option)
200/220 Vac
15
RS-485
Relay circuit
Run
command
1
2
3
USB

-10 V to +10 V
RJ-45
Panel board
CN9
Sequence input
terminals
1
2
3
RJ-45
CN10-3
Frequency reference
4 to 20 mA DC
L1
L2
L3
CN13-1
Stop
command
CN21, 22
Ground resistance:
less than 100
CN10-1 CN10-2
Grounding of the
control system
terminal ED
Digital operator
ISO
AMP
RS-232
To panel board
board (option)
42

(option)
Relay circuit

L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Line driver
output PG
PG
CN11-2
Phase-A/B/Z input
Relay
board
(option)

CN12-2
Complementary PG
board (option)
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Complementary
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
Figure 3.3 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (Example: CIMR-MV2D6DA052)
79
Class: 6 kV
Figure 3.4
Main circuit input

terminals
AC 3-phase
R
6.0/6.6 kV
50/60 Hz
S
T
Main circuit output

terminals
R
S
T
U
V
W
Grounding of the
main circuit
terminal EA

AC single-phase R
200/220 V
S
50/60 Hz

ISO
AMP
RC
SC
CN4-2
ISO
AMP
CN21, 22
CN4-1
Output
voltage
RS-232
Ground resistance:
less than 100
Current detection
resistance board
L1
L2
L3
AI_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
CN13-2

13
14
15
DI
1
2
3
Reserved
6
8
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
10
Sequence output
terminals
30
Output
(transfer
contact)
31
35
34
CN12-1
CN12-1
36
38
Drive ready
37
39
Minor fault
AO_2
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L7
L8
L9
Analog output
terminals
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC
215IF
or
218IF
(Ethernet)
33
During run
ISO
AMP
L4
L5
L6
MC ANS
Expansion PLC
board (option)
32
Major fault
AO_1
GND
FG
MC ON
CN14-4
(Option)
Reserved
L47
L48

CN14-3
External fault
reset
Relay board
1
2
3
CN14-2
I/O
CN14-1
Operation interlock
26
27
28

-10 V to +10 V
CN11-1
DriveWizard Plus MV
Relay Circuit
Medium-voltage
Primary panel on
RS-232
DO
200/220 Vac
USB
(Option)
Relay circuit
Run
command
1
2
3
RS-485
RJ-45
Panel board
CN9
Sequence input
terminals
1
2
3
USB

-10 V to +10 V
RJ-45
CN10-3
Frequency reference
4 to 20 mA DC
CN13-1
Digital operator
CN10-1 CN10-2
Grounding of the
control system
terminal ED
Stop
command
6.0kV
(Option)
Ground resistance:
less than 10

terminals
RS-232
To panel board
board (option)

40
Medium-voltage
power shutdown
command
41
42

(option)
Relay circuit
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Line driver
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
CN11-2
Relay
board
(option)

CN12-2
Complementary PG
board (option)
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Complementary
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
Figure 3.4 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (Example: CIMR-MV2F5FA035)
80
Class: 11 kV
Figure 3.5
Main circuit input

terminals
AC 3-phase
R
11 kV
S
50/60 Hz
Main circuit output

terminals
R
S
T
U
V
W
Grounding of the
main circuit
terminal EA
11.0kV
(Option)
Ground resistance:
less than 10

terminals
AC single-phase R
200/220 V
50/60 Hz

ISO
AMP
RC
SC
CN4-2
Ground resistance:
less than 100
Current detection
Resistance board
L1
L2
L3
AI_1
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
CN13-2
13
14
15
DI
1
2
3
Reserved
6
8
1
2
3
1
2
3
(Option)
1
2
3
10
Sequence output
terminals
Major fault
30
Output
(transfer
contact)
31
34
CN12-1
38
37
39
Minor fault
40
Medium-voltage
Power shutdown
Command
41
ISO
AMP
L4
L5
L6
AO_2
GND
FG
ISO
AMP
L7
L8
L9
MC ANS
Analog output
terminals
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC
215IF
or
218IF
(Ethernet)
35
36
Drive ready
AO_1
GND
FG
MC ON
Expansion PLC
board (option)
32
33
During run
L47
L48

CN14-4
(Option)
Reserved
26
27
28
CN14-3
External fault
reset
Relay board
CN14-2
I/O
CN14-1
Operation interlock
DriveWizard Plus MV

-10 V to +10 V
CN11-1
RS-232
Relay circuit
Medium-voltage
Primary panel on
USB
DO
Panel board
(Option)
200/220 Vac
Relay circuit
Run
command
1
2
3
RS-485
RJ-45
CN9
Sequence input
terminals
1
2
3
USB

-10 V to +10 V
RJ-45
CN10-3
Frequency reference
4 to 20 mA DC
CN13-1
Stop
command
CN4-1
Output
voltage
RS-232
CN21, 22
CN10-1 CN10-2
Grounding of the
control system
terminal ED
Digital operator
ISO
AMP
RS-232
To panel board
board (option)
42

(option)
Relay circuit

L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A signal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
Line driver
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input

CN12-2
Complementary PG
board (option)
L19
L20
L21
L22
L23
L24
L25
Phase-A dignal
Phase-B signal
12 V or 5.5 V 5%,
max. 200 mA
Ground
CN11-2
Relay
board
(option)
Complementary
output PG
PG
Phase-A/B/Z input
Figure 3.5 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (Example: CIMR-MV2H5HA035)
81
3.3 Terminals
3.3
Terminals
The locations of the drive terminals are shown below.

Figure 3.6
Front view
2.4kV
B
Right side view

$0.
Left side view
$0.
6
6
(.
%

%#76+10
2NGCUGNCRDCPFDGVYGGPRCPGNHNCOG
JQNGCPFJCPFNGCVVTCPURQTV
$0.
$0.
4%
6
4%
5%
%$
$0.
5%
$0.
$0.
%
$0.
'&
6
$0.
$0.
$0.
$0.
%$
$0.
%$
'&
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
$0.
6
%

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
6
(.
6
6
%
6
6
%
6
6
%
E
Transformer panel
Power Cell panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
C Control circuit terminals
Grounding terminal ED
Control panel
D Main circuit output terminals U, V and W

E Grounding terminal EA
F Main circuit input terminals R, S, and T
Figure 3.6 Terminal Locations (Drive: 2-kV Class, 700 HP)

Figure 3.7
Front view
Left side view

3.0kV
A

Power Cell
panel

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
F

%$
%$

Right side view
%$

U
T
Transformer
panel
V W
E
Control panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell

Figure 3.7 Terminal Locations (Drive: 3-kV Class, 800 kVA)
82
3.3 Terminals
Figure 3.8
Front view
4.16kV
B
Right side view

$0.
Left side view
$0.
6
6
(.
%

%#76+10
$0.
$0.
6
4%
4%
5%
%$
$0.
$0.
%
$0.
5%
$0.
6
'&
$0.
$0.
%$
$0.
$0.
%$
'&
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
$0.
6
$0.
6
%

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
(.
6
6
%
6
6
%
6
6
%
E
Transformer panel
Power Cell panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
Control panel

Figure 3.8 Terminal Locations (Drive: 4-kV Class, 1250 HP)

Figure 3.9
Front view
6.0kV
Left side view
Right side view
V W
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
Power Cell panel
Control panel

Transformer panel
83
3.3 Terminals
Figure 3.10
11.0kV
Front view
B
Left side view
Right side view

%#76+10

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
%$
%$
'&
%$
4%
5%
Transformer panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cell
Power Cell panel
Control panel

84
3.4 Routing Cables
3.4
Routing Cables
The structure of the terminals conforms to JCS standards stipulated by the Japanese Electric Wire & Cable Makers
Association. Route the cables according to the JCS standards appropriate for the input voltage used.
Examples of cable routing are shown below.
Note: Secure the cables with cable brackets. Do not secure them at an intermediate point between the cable bracket and control circuit
terminals. Prepare cable brackets suitable for the size of the cables used.
Check Before Routing Cables

Main Circuit Input-side Cable
Route the input cable at the input side of the drive into the transformer panel through the inlet port of the drive input
cable at the bottom of the transformer panel.
Mount a cable bracket on the cable bracket clamp near the cable inlet port to secure the cables.
Main Circuit Output-side Cable
Route the output cable at the output side of the drive into the Power Cell panel through the inlet port of the drive output
cable at the bottom of the transformer panel.
Mount a cable bracket on the cable bracket clamp near the cable inlet port to secure the cables.
NOTICE: Keep the wiring for the main circuit separate from that for the control circuit. Select a power supply with a capacity larger
than that of the drive to be connected. When connecting multiple drives to a single power supply, select a power supply with
a capacity larger than the sum of the power required by all the drives to be connected. Even when the power supply has
sufficient capacity, the power supply voltage may drop when the power is turned on, causing malfunction of connected
devices if the power supply has a large power impedance.
Figure 3.11
Front view
Transformer panel
2.4kV
Power Cell panel
Control panel
Left side view
Right side view

A
$0.
$0.
6
6
(.
%

%#76+10
$0.
$0.
6
4%
5%
4%
$0.
$0.
$0.
%
5%
%$
$0.
6
'&
$0.
$0.
$0.
$0.
%$
$0.
%$
'&
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
$0.
6
%

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
6
(.
6
6
%
6
6
H
E
%
E
6
6
%
A
B
C
D
Cooling fan
Power Cell
Control circuit terminal
Main circuit output terminals U, V and W
E
F
G
H
Cable bracket clamp

Main circuit cable
Cable bracket
Main circuit input terminals R, S, and T
Figure 3.11 Cable Routing (Drive: 2-kV Class, 700 HP)
85
3.4 Routing Cables

Figure 3.12
Front view
3.0kV
Control panel
Left side view
Right side view
A

Power Cell panel

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
%$
%$
I

%$

V W
Transformer
panel
E

H
F
A
B
C
D
E
Cooling fan
Power Cell
Cable bracket clamp
F
G
H
I
Main circuit cable

Control circuit cable
Cable bracket
Figure 3.12 Cable Routing (Drive: 3-kV Class, 800 kVA)

Figure 3.13
Front view
Transformer panel
4.16kV
Power Cell panel
Control panel
Left side view
Right side view

A
$0.
$0.
6
6
(.
%

%#76+10
$0.
$0.
6
4%
5%
4%
$0.
$0.
$0.
%
5%
%$
$0.
6
'&
$0.
$0.
%$
$0.
$0.
%$
'&
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
%$
$0.
6
$0.
6
%

%#76+10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
(.
6
6
%
6
6
I
E
%
E
6
6
%
A
B
C
D
E
Cooling fan
Power Cell
Cable bracket clamp
F
G
H
I
Main circuit cable

Cable bracket
Figure 3.13 Cable Routing (Drive: 4-kV Class, 1250 HP)
86
3.4 Routing Cables

Figure 3.14
Front view
6.0kV
Power Cell panel
Transformer panel
Left side view
Control panel
Right side view
A
B
C
D
E
Cooling fan
Power Cell
Cable bracket clamp
F
G
H
I
Main circuit cable

Cable bracket

Figure 3.15
Front view
11.0kV
Power Cell panel
Transformer panel
Control panel
Left side view
Right side view

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
%$
%$
'&
%$
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
'&
4%
5%
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
G
H
Cooling fan
Power Cell
Cable bracket clamp
F
G
H
I
Main circuit cable

Cable bracket
87
3.4 Routing Cables
Caution when Routing Cables

NOTICE: The area where the cables enter the bottom of the drive should be tightly sealed with fire-resistant putty so that no open
space remains. Make sure the entire peripheral areas around the channel base and the pit cover are tightly sealed with the
putty so that no opening remains. A proper operating environment cannot be maintained if air or dust from the outside makes
its way into the drive, and can result in damage to the equipment.
Figure 3.16
Grounding terminal of the bracket
Completely seal the external cable inlet port

with fire-resistant putty so that no open space
remains.
Figure 3.16 External Cable Inlet Port

Figure 3.17
L
K
Calking
(plugs any opening)
A
J
Pit cover
Pit loop
angle
H
C
E
G
Wiring pit
Main ground (EA): 10 max.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bracket
Fire-resistant putty
Calking (plugs any opening)
Pit cover (plugs any opening)
Panel support base
Cable
G
H
I
J
K
L
Ground wire
Base of enclosure panel
Grounding bar
Bracket ground
Shield ground
Cable terminal control
Figure 3.17 Area Around the Drive Channel Base and Pit Cover
88
3.5 Main Circuit Wiring
3.5
Main Circuit Wiring
This section describes the functions of the main circuit terminals, and the specifications, and procedures required to
safely and properly wire the main circuit in the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring
could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
Main Circuit Terminals (Common to All Capacities)

Input Terminals
Table 3.1 Main Circuit Input Terminals
Terminal Code
Terminal Name
Main circuit phase-R input
Main circuit phase-S input
Main circuit phase-T input
Specifications
Main circuit AC three-phase inputs
2.4 kVac
3.0/3.3 kVac
4.16 kVac
6.0/6.6 kVac
10.5/11 kVac
50 Hz/60 Hz
Output Terminals
Table 3.2 Main Circuit Output Terminals
Terminal Code
Terminal Name
Main circuit phase-U output
Main circuit phase-V output
Main circuit phase-W output
Specifications
Main circuit AC three-phase outputs (sinusoidal wave, proportional to input
voltage)
2.4 kVac
3.0/3.3 kVac
4.16 kVac
6.0/6.6 kVac
10.5/11 kVac
50 Hz/60 Hz
NOTICE: Do not short circuit the drive output terminals or connect the power supply lines to output terminals U, V and W of the drive.
Incorrect wiring can result in damage to the drive. Carry out wiring that conforms to the wire gauges and tightening torques
described in this manual. Conduct a thorough check of wiring and sequences before turning the power on.
NOTICE: Select a main circuit power supply with a capacity larger than that of the drive to be connected. Inputs and outputs of the
drive (main circuit) contain harmonic components that may adversely affect communication devices, such as AM radios,
used in the vicinity. Use high-voltage cables and ground any shielded cables. Separate cables for control from high-current
circuits (main circuit and relay sequence circuits) to avoid induction from peripheral devices. (It is advisable to separate them
by a distance of 30 cm or more.)
89
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from the table below.
Consider the voltage drop when selecting wire gauges.
Select the wire gauge so that the voltage drop can be limited to within 2% of the motor rated voltage. If there is a risk of
a drop voltage, increase the wire gauge in accordance with the length of the cable. Use the following formula to calculate
the line drop voltage:
Line drop voltage (V) =
3 wire resistance (/km) wire length (m) motor rated current (A) 10-3
Note: The following conditions are assumed about the operating environment of the recommended wires for main circuit use.
ambient temperature of 40C max., wiring distance less than 100 m, and use at the rated current value.
Class: 2 kV
Table 3.3 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Class: 2 kV)
Voltage Class
(kV)
Model
CIMRMV2A6AA
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Function
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Toque
(Nm)
52
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
58
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
77
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
93
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
102
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
115
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
135
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
160
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
180
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
205
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
052
058
077
093
102
2
115
135
160
180
205 <1>
90
Applicable
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
22 to 100
(4 to 4/0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
22 to 100
(4 to 4/0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
22 to 60
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
22 to 60
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
22 to 60
(10 to 6)
38 to 100
(2 to 4/0)
22 to 60
(10 to 6)
60 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
22 to 150
(4 to 300MCM)

Voltage Class
(kV)
Model
CIMRMV2A6AA
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Toque
(Nm)
Function
220
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
280
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
330
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
390
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
440
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
505
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
550
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
600
I/O
R, S, T, U, V, W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
220 <1>
280 <1>
330 <1>
390 <1>
440 <1>
505 <1>
550 <1>
600 <1>
Applicable
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
60 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
22 to 150
(4 to 300MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to
600MCM)
91

Class: 3 kV
Voltage Class
(kV)
Model
CIMRMV2CCA
035
050
070
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
92
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Toque
(Nm)
Applicable
Wire Size
(mm)
Function
35
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
50
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
70
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
100
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38
140
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
22 to 60
200
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
260
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
60 to 100
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 150
330
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
400
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
520
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
650
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325

Class: 4 kV
Model
Voltage Class
CIMR(kV)
MV2D6DA
052
058
064
077
093
102
115
125
4
155
190
220 <1>
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw
Size
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
Applicable
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Function
52
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100 (4 to 4/0)
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14 (10 to 6)
58
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100 (4 to 4/0)
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14 (10 to 6)
64
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100 (4 to 4/0)
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14 (10 to 6)
77
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38 (10 to 2)
93
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38 (10 to 2)
102
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38 (10 to 2)
115
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
22 to 60 (4 to 1/0)
125
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
22 to 60 (4 to 1/0)
155
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100 (4 to 4/0)
190
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100 (2 to 4/0)
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100 (4 to 4/0)
220
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
60 to 100 (1/0 to 4/0)
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
250
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
285
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
315
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
340
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
250 <1>
285 <1>
315 <1>
340 <1>
22 to 150
(4 to 300MCM)
60 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
22 to 150
(4 to 300MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
93

Model
Voltage Class
CIMR(kV)
MV2D6DA
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw
Size
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
Function
375
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
440
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
505
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
575
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
650
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
375 <1>
440 <1>
505 <1>
575 <1>
625 <1>
Applicable
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
60 to 200
(1/0 to 400MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
150 to 325
(300MCM to 600MCM)
94

Class: 6 kV
Voltage Class
(kV)
Model
CIMRMV2FFA
035
050
070
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Toque
(Nm)
Applicable
Wire Size
(mm2)
Function
35
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
50
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
70
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
100
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38
140
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
22 to 60
200
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
260
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
60 to 100
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 150
330
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
400
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
520
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
650
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
650
Rated Output
Current
(A)
95

Class: 11 kV
Voltage Class
(kV)
Model
CIMRMV2CCA
035
050
070
100
140
11
200
260 <1>
330 <1>
400 <1>
520 <1>
650 <1>
Rated Output
Current
(A)
Terminal
Code
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Toque
(Nm)
Applicable
Wire Size
(mm2)
Function
35
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
50
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
60
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 14
70
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
80
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
100
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
125
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
5.5 to 38
140
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
150
Ground
EA
M8
8.9 to 10.8
22 to 60
200
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
38 to 100
200
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 100
260
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M10
18.0 to 23.0
60 to 100
300
Ground
EA
M10
18.0 to 23.0
22 to 150
330
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
400
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
400
Ground
EA
M12
31.5 to 39.5
60 to 200
520
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M12
31.5 to 39.5
150 to 325
600
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
650
I/O
R,S,T,U,V,W
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
800
Ground
EA
M16
78.5 to 98.0
150 to 325
96
Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor
terminals.
Make the input and output terminal connections correctly, checking their codes.
DANGER! Do not touch the input and output terminals directly with your hands and do not bring the input and output wires into
contact with the drive case or metal parts. In addition, do not short circuit the output wires. Incorrect wiring could lead to
death or serious injury by an electric shock or grounding fault.
NOTICE: Connect input terminals U, V and W of the motor to output terminals U, V and W of the drive, pairing the terminal codes. The
phase orders of the motor terminals and drive terminals should also match. The motor may run in reverse if the phase orders
do not match.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury
by fire as a result of drive damage.
Precautions on Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

Voltage drop along the motor cable may cause reduced motor torque when the wiring between the drive and the motor is
too long. Particular care is required with low frequency output. This can also be a problem when motors are connected in
parallel with a long total cable length. Drive output current will increase as the harmonic leakage current from the cable
increases. An increase in leakage current may trip the drive due to an overcurrent and diminish the current detection
accuracy.
Precautions on Connections Between Drive and Motor
Connect the motor lead wires U, V, and W to the drive main circuit output terminals U, V, and W matching their codes.
Confirm that the motor rotates in the forward direction on execution of the forward run command. If the motor rotates in
reverse, check the codes of the drives output terminals and the motors input terminals, then switch over any two of the
motor output terminals U, V and W.
When using a motor with a PG, also switch phases-A and -B output signals. And use the cable wire specified by Yaskawa
when connecting the drive and the PG circuit.
Precautions on Grounding
Carefully follow the precautions below to correctly ground drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use a ground wire of a gauge that complies with the technical standards for electrical
equipment in the country where the drive is being used. Keep the wiring as short as possible. Improper equipment
grounding could cause leakage current to flow to the drive. If so, the potential of the drive's ground terminals becomes
unstable at some distance from the grounding point, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper
grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, follow the instructions in this manual and ensure that the ground wires do not form a loop.
When using more than one drive, ground them as shown below. Do not loop the ground wire.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always ground the ground terminals. Also be sure to carry out the following grounding work.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by an electric shock through contact with
ungrounded electrical equipment.
Ground terminals (EA): Grounding resistance of 10 or less
Control circuits (200 V or less): Grounding resistance of 100 or less
Figure 3.18
Not
Good
OK
Figure 3.18 Multiple Drive Wiring
97
3.6 Control Circuit Wiring
3.6
Control Circuit Wiring
Control Circuit Terminals

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. After an emergency stop circuit has been wired, check to make sure that it is operating
properly. Emergency stop circuits are needed to safely and quickly stop the operation of the drive. Operating a drive
with an emergency stop circuit whose operation has not been checked could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting the test run. Failure to comply may result in death
or serious injury.
Analog Input and Output Terminals

Table 3.8 Analog Input and Output Terminals
Type
Analog input
terminals
Terminal
Signal Name
L1
L2
Signal Level
Speed (frequency) reference
4 to 20 mA DC,
0 to 60 Hz
Output frequency
4 to 20 mA DC,
0 to 60 Hz
Output current
4 to 20 mA DC,
0 to 150%
Speed (frequency) reference input

signal
Ground
Shield ground
Output frequency reference output
signal
Ground
Shield ground
Output frequency reference output
signal
Ground
Shield ground
L3
L4
L5
Analog output
terminals
L6
L7
L8
Terminal Function
L9
Sequence Input and Output Terminals

Table 3.9 Sequence Input and Output Terminals
Type
Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
Sequence
input
terminals
Signal Name
Medium-voltage primary
panel on
Operation interlock
Reserved
7
External fault reset
8
9
Reserved
10
Signal Level
Contact input
220 Vac/8 mA
Contact input
220 Vac/8 mA
Contact input
220 Vac/8 mA
Terminal Function
ON: Turning on (closed at default)
ON: Established (closed at default)
ON: Reset
Contact input
ON: Run
13
14
15
98
Run command/stop command
220 Vac/8 mA
OFF: Stop

Terminal
Signal Name
Major fault
Open: Major fault (32-31)

Closed: Major fault (32-30)
During run
Transfer contact relay

220 Vac/15 A,
110 Vac/15 A,
24 Vdc/15 A
Closed: During run (35-33)

Open: During run (35-34)
Drive ready

220 Vac/15 A,
110 Vac/15 A,
24 Vdc/15 A
Closed: Drive ready (38-36)

Open: Drive ready (38-37)
32
33
34
35
36
Sequence output
terminals
37
38
39
Minor fault
40
41
42
Terminals for
inrush current
suppression
circuit
Medium-voltage power
shutdown command
N.O. contact relay output
28
220 Vac/10 A,
24 Vdc/10 A
Inrush current suppression

circuit (option)
28
L47
N.C. contact relay output
L48
L19
A pulse signal input
L20
A inverse signal input
L21
B pulse signal input
Line driver
PG interface PG-X3
(Option)
Closed: Minor fault
Closed (N.C.): Turning off

(closed when power is off)
MC_ON signal
(Output in response to Drive
Ready)
220 Vac/10 A,
24 Vdc/10 A
Contact output
220 Vac/8 mA
L22
MC_ANS signal
(Closed by answer from inrush
current suppression panel)
Inputs the A and B signals

Signal levels: Equivalent to RS-422
B inverse signal input
L24
PG power supply common
Output voltage:
12 V 5% or 5.5 V 5%
Max. output current: 200 mA
L25
Ground
Grounds shielded lines
L19
A+ pulse signal input
L20
A- pulse signal input
L23
Terminals for
the PG <1>
N.O. contact relay

220 Vac/15 A,
110 Vac/15 A,
24 Vdc/15 A
N.C. contact output
220 Vac/4 A,
110 Vac/7 A
200 Vdc/4 A
100 Vdc/7 A
26
27
Terminal Function

220 Vac/15 A,
110 Vac/15 A,
24 Vdc/15 A
30
31
Signal Level
L21
L22
L23
Complementary type
PG interface PG-B3
(Option)
PG power supply
B+ pulse signal input
Type
Inputs the A and B channel

Signal levels: High level: 8 to 12 V
Low level: 2.0 V or less
B- pulse signal input

PG power supply
L24
PG power supply common
Output voltage: 12 V 5%
Max. output current: 200 mA
L25
Ground
Grounds shielded lines
<1> When a PG interface is mounted, either a line driver PG interface or a complementary type PG interface is prepared.
Note: Depending on a parameter setting, either one or two boards can be inserted. In this table, it is assumed that one board is inserted.
99

Control Power Supply Input Terminals
Table 3.10 Control Power Supply Input Terminals
Type
Terminal
Terminal Function
Control power supply input

terminal
RC
SC
200/220 Vac
50/60 Hz
Ground terminal
ED
Grounding of the control system
Control Circuit Terminal Layout and Specifications

The control circuit terminals are arranged on a terminal block as shown below.
Figure 3.19
(Option)
L1 to L9
L19 to L25
L47 to L48
1 to 42
26 to 28
Reserved
ED
RC1
SC1 (Option)
RC
SC
$0.
Figure 3.19 Terminal Configuration
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Select appropriate wire type and gauges from Table 3.11.
Table 3.11 Wire Gauges and Torque Specifications
Terminal
Type
Terminal Screw
Size
Analog
input and
L1 to L9
M3.5
output
terminals
Sequence
input and
1 to 42
M3.5
output
terminals
Terminals
for inrush
26 to 28
M3.5
current
L47 to L48
suppression
circuit
Control
power
RC
M5
supply
SC
input
terminals
100
Tightening
Torque
Nm
Applicable Gauge
mm2
(AWG)
Recommended
Gauge
mm2
(AWG)
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2 <2>
(20 to 14)
1.25 (12)
Shielded twisted-pair wire <1>
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2 <2>
(20 to 14)
1.25 (12)
Insulated vinyl sheathed cable (CVV)

for control circuit
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2 <2>
(20 to 14)
1.25 (12)
Insulated vinyl sheathed cable (CVV)

for control circuit
2 to 2.5
8 to 14 <2>
(8 to 6)
8 (8)
600-V insulated vinyl sheathed cable

(VV)
Wire Type
Terminal
Type
Terminal Screw
Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm
Applicable Gauge
mm2
(AWG)
Recommended
Gauge
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
600-V insulated vinyl sheathed cable

(VV)
Ground
input
terminals
ED
M5
2 to 2.5
8 to 14 <2>
(20 to 14)
8 (8)
Terminals
for the PG
L19 to L25
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2 <2>
(20 to 14)
1.25 (12)
Shielded twisted-pair wire <1>
<1> Use shielded twisted-pair wires to input an external speed (frequency) reference.
<2> The size of the round crimp terminals must meet the standards in the country where the drive is being used.
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
Use shielded twisted-pair wires for analog I/O (terminals L1 to L9) wirings to prevent malfunctions caused by noise.
Use round crimp terminals to connect signal wires to the terminal block.
Use a Phillips screw driver to tighten terminal screws.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not touch circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death or
serious injury.
NOTICE: When wiring the control circuit, separate it from the main circuit wiring (terminals R, S, T, U, V and W) and other power lines.
Improper grounding could result in drive malfunction.
NOTICE: Insulate the shielded wires of the drive, e.g. with tape, to prevent their contact with other signal lines or devices. Failure to
comply could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
101
3.7 Connecting to a PC
3.7
Connecting to a PC
This drive is equipped with a USB port (type-B).

The drive can connect to the USB port (A type) of a PC using a USB 2.0, AB type cable available on the market.
DriveWizard Plus MV can then be used to set parameters.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of DriveWizard Plus MV.
Figure 3.20
59
75$
12
2.%
(B type)
USB cable
(AB type)
(A type)
PC
Figure 3.20 Connecting to a PC (USB)
102
3.8 External Interlock
3.8
External Interlock
With applications that may be affected if the drive faults out, always interlock the Fault and Drive ready sequence
output signals.
Drive Ready
When the Drive ready signal has been set to the sequence output, that output will close whenever the drive is ready to
accept a Run command or is already running. During faults, the output is open. It will also switch off and remain off
when the drive is unable to run even if a Run command is entered although no fault signal is output. The Drive ready
signal goes off under the following conditions.
when the power supply is shut off.

during a fault.
when there is problem with the control power supply.
when a parameter setting error makes the drive unable to run even if a Run command has been entered.
when a fault such as overvoltage or undervoltage is triggered as soon as the Run command is entered.
when the drive is in the Programming mode and will not accept a Run command even when entered.
Interlock Circuit Example

In some cases external signals other than the configuration signals of the drive are required as a condition for the drive to
run.
In such cases, in addition to the ready conditions stated above, input these external interlock signals to the drive to use
them as external interlock signals.
If any condition for these external interlock signals is not satisfied, the drive stops.
An example circuit configuration is shown below.
Figure 3.21
Schematic for the drives internal circuit

Run command
Drive
Interlock signal input
Primary panel on
Drive internal
circuit
Run command
Drive ready
circuit
Drive ready
Run
command
External interlock
Interlock established <1>
Secondary panel on
Motor temperature normal
Example of interlock
signal input <2>
Figure 3.22
<1> External interlock signifies conditions where machinery or equipment could be damaged if the drive or motor is run outside
the scope of its specifications.
<2> Always allocate necessary signals for protecting the system as external interlock signals.
Examples: Machine lubrication unit normal (N.O. contact), emergency stop normal (N.O. contact), etc.
Figure 3.21 Interlock Circuit Example
103
3.9 Wiring Check
3.9
Wiring Check
Checks
After wiring work, check that all wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Confirm
the following items.
All wiring is correct.

No foreign matter such as wire chips or unnecessary screws remain.
There are no loose screws. (If there are, tighten them.)
No wire ends have contact with terminals other than the ones they are connected to.
The terminal numbers and cable lead names match up.
104
4
Start-Up Programming & Operation
This chapter describes the performance of digital operator, each mode of digital operator and
the operation of Auto-Tuning and others.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USING THE DIGITAL OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START-UP FLOWCHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER UP AND CHECKING THE OPERATION DISPLAY STATUS . . . . . . . .
AUTO-TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VERIFYING PARAMETER SETTINGS AND BACKING UP CHANGES. . . . . . .
106
107
111
118
121
122
128
130
131
105
4.1 Section Safety
4.1
Section Safety
DANGER


Do not open the drive panel doors while main circuit power is on.
Incorrect handling could result in an electric shock. Make sure that the drive panel doors are closed before turning on
the main power supply.
The diagrams in this section may be indicated with the doors open to show details. Be sure to close the doors before
operating the drive and run the drive it in accordance with the instructions in this manual.
WARNING
Safety Measures at the Machine

Do not forget to include an emergency stop circuit in the application.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. A communication error between the digital operator keypad
and the drives internal control board may make it impossible to stop the drive with the digital operator.
After an emergency stop circuit has been wired, check to make sure it is operating properly.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The emergency stop circuit may fail to operate if left
unchecked. The user is fully responsible for properly wiring the emergency circuit.
Some systems may start moving in response to the supply of power alone, resulting in death or serious injury.
Make sure that there are no personnel around the drive, motor and machine before turning the power on. Also check
that couplings with motors, shaft keys and machinery are properly protected.
106
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
4.2
Using the Digital Operator
Use the digital operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well as display fault and alarm
information.
Keys and Displays

Figure 4.1
ALM
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180
12
F1
11
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
10
RUN
9
8
STOP
Figure 4.1 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator

Key
F1
1
F2
Name
Function Key
(F1, F2)
ESC Key
RESET Key
RUN
The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the menu that is currently displayed. The
name of each function appears in the lower half of the display window. Refer to LCD Display on
page 108 for the details of the functions assigned.
Up Arrow Key
6
STOP
STOP Key <1>
Returns to the previous display.

Moves the cursor one space to the left.
Pressing and holding this button will return to the Frequency Reference display.
Moves the cursor to the right.
Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
Runs the drive in the LOCAL mode.
Down Arrow Key
RUN Key
Function
Scrolls up to display the next item.

Selects parameter numbers and increments setting values.
Scrolls down to display the next item.
Selects parameter numbers and decrements setting values.
Stops drive operation.

Enters parameter values and settings.
Selects a menu item to move between displays.
Switches drive control between the digital operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit terminals
(REMOTE).
ENTER Key
LO/RE Selection
Key <2>
10
RUN Light
Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page 109 for
the details.
LO/RE Light
Lit while the digital operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode).
ALM LED Light
Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page 109 for the details.
11
12
LO
RE
Start-Up Programming
& Operation
No.
<1> The STOP key has highest priority.

The drive can be stopped in an emergency stop status by pressing the
key, even if a Run command is active at any external Run
command source. To disable the
key priority, set parameter o2-02 to 0.
<2> The LO/RE key can only switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is stopped.
LO
To disable the RE
key to prohibit switching between LOCAL and REMOTE, set parameter o2-01 to 0.
107
LCD Display
Figure 4.2
4
5
8
9
Figure 4.2 LCD Display
Table 4.1 Display and Contents

No.
Name
Operation Mode Menus
Mode Display Area
3
4
Ready
Data Display
Frequency
Reference
Assignment <1>
LO/RE
Display <2>
Function Key 1
(F1)
FWD/REV
Function Key 2
(F2)
Display
MODE
MONITR
VERIFY
PRMSET
A.TUNE
SETUP
DRV
PRG
Rdy
OPR
AI
COM
OP
RP
RSEQ
LSEQ
RREF
LREF
Content
Displayed when in Mode Selection.
Displayed when in Monitor Mode.
Indicates the Verify Menu.
Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode.
Displayed during Auto-Tuning.
Displayed when in Setup Mode.
Displayed when in Drive Mode.
Displayed when in Programming Mode.
Indicates the drive is ready to run.
Displays specific data and operation data.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the Digital Operator Option.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the drives Analog Input.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the drives MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communication Inputs.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to an drive Option Unit.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the drives Pulse Train Input.
Displayed when the run command is supplied from a remote source.
Displayed when the run command is supplied from the digital operator keypad.
Displayed when the frequency reference is supplied from a remote source.
Displayed when the frequency reference is supplied from the digital operator keypad.
JOG
Pressing
F1
executes the Jog function.
HELP
Pressing
F1
displays the Help menu.
Pressing
F1
scrolls the cursor to the left.
HOME
Pressing
F1
returns to the top menu (Frequency Reference).
ESC
Pressing
F1
returns to the previous display.
FWD
REV
Indicates forward motor operation.

Indicates reverse motor operation.
FWD/REV
Pressing
F2
switches between forward and reverse.
DATA
Pressing
F2
scrolls to the next display.
Pressing
F2
scrolls the cursor to the right.
RESET
Pressing
F2
resets the existing drive fault or error.
<1> Displayed when in Frequency Reference Mode.

<2> Displayed when in Frequency Reference Mode and Monitor Mode.
108
ALARM (ALM) LED Displays

Table 4.2 ALARM (ALM) LED Status and Contents
State
Lit
Flashing
Off
Content
Display
When the drive detects a fault.

When an alarm occurs.
When oPE is detected.
When a fault or error occurs during Auto-Tuning.
Normal operation (no fault or alarm).
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

Table 4.3 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
LED
LO
RE
RUN
Lit
When source of the Run
command is assigned to the
digital operator (LOCAL)
Flashing
Flashing Quickly <1>
Off
Run command to be given
from a device other than the
digital operator (REMOTE)
During deceleration to stop Decelerating for emergency

When a Run command is
stop
During halt
input and frequency
During stop by operation
reference is 0 Hz
interlock <2>
During run
Examples
<1> Refer to Figure 4.3 for the difference between flashing and fast flashing of the RUN indicator.
<2> Fast flashing occurs in the following cases.
While the drive is set for LOCAL, a Run command was entered to the input terminals after which the drive was then switched to
REMOTE.
x A Run command was entered via the input terminals while not in the Drive Mode.
x During deceleration when a Fast Stop command was entered.
x While the drive was running in the REMOTE mode, the STOP key was pushed.
x The control power was turned on with b1-17=0 (default) while the Run command is active.
Figure 4.3
1 sec
ON
ON
Flashing
common_TMonly
ON
ON
ON
ON
Flashing quickly
Figure 4.3 RUN LED Status and Meaning

Figure 4.4
Drive output
frequency
Frequency setting
RUN LED
during stop
6 Hz
0 Hz
OFF
RUN
RUN STOP
STOP
ON
Flashing
OFF
Flashing
common_TMonly
& Operation
OFF
Figure 4.4 RUN LED and Drive Operation
109
Menu Structure for Digital Operator
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

FREF d1-01
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
U1-01= 000.00Hz
0.0060.00
0.00Hz
FWD
- MODE - DRV Rdy

Monitor Menu
U1-01= 0.00Hz
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

Monitor
U1 -01= 0.00Hz
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

Frequency Ref
U1- 01 = 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE PRG
Modified Consts
Modified
X Parameters
HELP FWD DATA
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

Fault Trace
U2 -01= oC
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

Output Freq
U1- 02 = 0.00Hz
LSEQ
U2-02= oPr
U2-03= 0.00Hz LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
U1-03= 0.0A
LSEQ
U1-04= 0
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Programming mode
<2>
Drive mode
<1>
Figure 4.5
<4>
<3>
- MODE PRG
Quick Setting
Initial screen <5>

HELP FWD DATA
MV1000
- MODE PRG
Programming
YASKAWA
MV1000
XXXXV, X.X/X.XkW
XX.XX/XX.XXA
<XXXXXXXXX>
<6>
HELP FWD DATA
- MODE PRG
Auto-Tuning
AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
RUN
<1> Pressing
will start the motor.
<2> The drive cannot operate the motor.
<3> Flashing characters are shown as 0 .
<4> X characters are shown in this manual. The Digital Operator will display the actual setting values.
<5> The frequency reference appears after the initial display which shows the product name.
<6> The information that appears on the display will vary depending on the drive.
Figure 4.5 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure
110
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
4.3
The Drive and Programming Modes
The drive has a Programming Mode to program the drive for operation, and a Drive Mode used to actually run the motor.
Drive Mode: In the Drive Mode, the user can start the motor and observe operation status with the monitors that are
available. Parameter settings cannot be edited or changed when in the Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to edit, adjust, and verify parameters, as well as perform
Auto-Tuning. Unless set to allow a Run command, the drive will not accept a Run command when the digital operator is
in the Programming Mode.
Table 4.4 describes the functions accessible by pressing the
keys of the digital operator.
Note: To allow the drive to run the motor while in the Programming Mode, set b1-08 to 1.
Table 4.4 Modes

Mode
Contents
Frequency Reference
Key
x
Drive Mode
(Operation/operation status
monitor of the motor)
Monitor Display
Verify Menu
Setup Group
Programming Mode
(Parameter setting)
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Monitor Menu
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE PRG
Modified Consts
Modified
X Parameters
HELP FWD DATA
- MODE PRG
Quick Setting
HELP FWD DATA
Parameter Setting Mode
- MODE PRG
Programming
HELP FWD DATA
Auto-Tuning Mode
- MODE PRG
Auto-Tuning
AUTO
& Operation
HELP FWD DATA
111
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes

The drive is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display screens by using the
and
keys.
Frequency Reference
Power Up
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Default Setting
Drive Mode
This display screen allows the user to monitor and change the frequency reference. For
information on how to change the frequency setting value, The Drive and Programming
Modes on page 111.
Note: The user can select the data displayed when the drive is first powered up with
parameter o1-02.
Monitor Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
Monitor Menu
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Lists the monitor parameters (U- parameters) available in the drive.
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Verify Menu
- MODE PRG
Modified Consts
Modified
X Parameters
HELP FWD DATA
Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default settings.
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on page 115
Setup Group
- MODE PRG
Quick Setting
Lists parameters necessary to get the drive operating quickly.

Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group on page 114
HELP FWD DATA
Programming
Mode
Parameter Setting
Mode
- MODE PRG
Programming
Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings.

Setup Group Parameters on page 117
HELP FWD DATA
Auto-Tuning Mode
- MODE PRG
Auto-Tuning
AUTO
Motor parameters are calculated and set automatically.

Auto-Tuning on page 122
HELP FWD DATA
Frequency
Reference
Drive Mode
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Returns to the frequency reference display screen.
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
112

Drive Mode Details
The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode:
Run and stop the drive

Monitor the operation status of the drive (frequency reference, output frequency, output current, output voltage, etc.)
View information on an alarm
View a history of alarms that have occurred
Note: To run the drive, select the Drive Mode. Other modes are selectable while the drive is in a halt but only the Drive Mode can start
operation of the drive.
Key operations in the Drive Mode are shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.6 illustrates how to change the frequency reference from F 0.00 (0 Hz) to F 6.00 (6 Hz) while in the Drive
Mode. This example assumes the drive is set to LOCAL.
Figure 4.6
Frequency reference
display at power up
-MONITR- DRV Rdy
FREF (d1-01)
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-01= 000.00Hz
0.0050.00
0.00Hz
FWD
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Press to select LOCAL
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

FREF (d1-01)
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

FREF (d1-01)
U1-01= 006.00Hz
0.0050.00
0.00Hz
FWD
U1-01= 006.00Hz
0.0050.00
0.00Hz
FWD
Entry Accepted
Figure 4.6
F1
F2
left
right
Press until the frequency

reference changes to 006.00 Hz
ESC
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 6.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
common
Setting the Frequency Reference while inTMonly
the Drive Mode
Note: The drive will not accept a change to the frequency reference until the ENTER key is pressed after the frequency reference is
entered. This feature prevents accidental setting of the frequency reference. To have the drive accept changes to the frequency
reference as soon as changes are made without requiring the ENTER key, set o2-05 to 1.
Programming Mode Details

In the programming mode, parameter setting and Auto-Tuning are enabled. The following actions are possible in the
Programming Mode:
& Operation
Verify mode: Check a list of parameters that have been changed from their original default values
Setup mode: Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup (See Simplified Setup Using the Setup
Group on page 114)
Parameter setting mode: Access and edit all parameter settings
Auto-Tuning mode: Automatically calculates and sets motor parameters to optimize drive performance
113

Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group
In the Setup Group, the drive lists the 32 parameters registered as User Parameters. It provides a simplified way to get the
application running right away by showing only the most important parameters. Refer to Figure 4.7 as an operation
example.
Note: For details on the parameters of the setup mode, refer to Chapter 1 Parameter List of the FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide.
Key operations in the setup mode are shown in the following figure.
In this example, the Setup Group is accessed to change b1-01 from 1 to 0. This changes the source of the frequency
reference from the control circuit terminals to the digital operator.
Figure 4.7
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE PRG
Quick Setting
HELP FWD DATA
Frequency reference
appears when
powered up
- SETUP - PRG Rdy
Application Sel
A1-06= 0 0
General
Home FWD DATA
Parameter Display
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

Control Method
A1-02= 2 2
Open Loop Vector
Home FWD DATA
- SETUP - PRG Rdy
Ref Source 1
<1>
b1-01= 1 1
Analog Input
1
FWD
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

Ref Source 1
Control Circuit
Terminal
b1-01= 1 1
Analog Input
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

Ref Source 1
Home FWD DATA
Entry Accepted
b1-01= 0 1
Operator
1
FWD
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

Run Source 1
Digital Operator
<2>
b1-02= 1 1
Digital Inputs
Home FWD DATA
- SETUP - PRG Rdy

StallP Decel Sel
L3-04= 1 1
General Purpose
Home FWD DATA
<1> To edit a parameter set value, go to the right steps.

To confirm the parameter list displayed in the Setup Group, go to the steps below.
<2> To go back to the initial screen, press
.
To edit another parameter in the Setup Group, press
or
.
Figure 4.7 Setup Group Example
114
Changing Parameter Settings or Values

Key operations are shown in the following using the Acceleration Time 1 (C1-01) for an example.
This example explains changing C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to 20.0 seconds.
Operating Procedure
1
Press and hold
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
to display the frequency reference screen.
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE PRG
Programming
Press
or
to display the parameter setting mode screen.

HELP FWD DATA
-PRMSET- PRG
Initialization
Press
to enter the parameter menu tree.
A1-00=0
Select Language
FWD
-PRMSET- PRG
Accel Time 1
Select C1-01 by
F1
or
F2
, and press
C1-01= 0010.0sec
0.06000.0
30.0sec
FWD
-PRMSET- PRG
Accel Time 1
Press the
F1
or
F2
key and enter 0020.0.
C1-01= 0020.0sec
0.006000.0
30.0sec
FWD
Press
and the drive will confirm the change.
Entry Accepted
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu

In the Verify Menu the parameters that have been changed from their settings on shipping, either in the Parameter Setting
Mode or as the result of Auto-Tuning, are displayed. It helps determine which settings have been changed, and is
particularly useful when replacing a drive. If no settings have been changed, the Verify Menu will read nonE. The
Verify Menu also allows users to quickly access and re-edit any parameters settings that have been changed. The
procedure is shown below.
Note: The Verify Menu will not display parameters from the A1 group (except for A1-02) even if those parameters have been changed
from their default settings.
Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
Press
or
Press
settings.
until the display shows the top of the Verify Menu.
to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their original default
Press
or
displays the changed parameters.
Press
or
until C1-01 is displayed.
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
& Operation
Operating Procedure
- MODE PRG
Modified Consts
Modified
X Parameters
HELP FWD DATA
- VERIFY - PRG
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 20.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
30.0sec
Home FWD DATA
- VERIFY - PRG
Accel Time 1
Press the
key to access the setting value. Left digit flashes.
C1-01=0020.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
30.0sec
Home FWD DATA
115
Switching between LOCAL and REMOTE

When the drive is set to accept the Run command from the digital operator RUN key, this is referred to as LOCAL mode.
When the drive is set to accept the Run command from an external device (via the input terminals, serial
communications, etc.) this is referred to as REMOTE mode.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching
from LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are
clear of rotating machinery.
The operation can be switched between LOCAL and REMOTE either by using the
key on the digital operator or a digital input.
Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator

Operating Procedure
1
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
ALM
- MODE - DRV Rdy

OPR
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Press
2
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
. The LO/RE light will light up.
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the
F1
LO
RE
key again. The LO/RE light will turn
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
RUN
STOP
on.
Off
Lit
Using Sequence Input Terminals 1 to 16 to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE

The user can also switch between LOCAL and REMOTE modes using one of the sequence input terminals H1-01 to H116 (set the corresponding parameter H1- to 1).
The following section describes the procedure for configuring the sequence input terminals.
Note: Setting H1- to 1 disables the LO/RE key on the digital operator.
116
Setup Group Parameters

Setup Group (STUP)
Parameters used in this drive are categorized into A to U. In order to simplify the drives setup, only the frequently used
parameters are selected into the setup mode.
1. Display the Setup Group screen first. Press the
or
key until the Setup Group screen is displayed.
2. Select a parameter, and change the setting. Table 4.5 shows the parameters that can be used in the Setup
Group. If a parameter to set is not found in the Setup Group, use the Parameter Setting Mode screen.
Note: 1. When the parameter A1-02 (Control Method Selection) is changed, the setting values of some parameters are changed
automatically.
2. This manual explains also the parameters that are not displayed in the setup mode. Use the Par menu in the program mode when
setting a parameter that is not displayed in the setup mode.
Table 4.5 Setup Group Parameters

Name
Control Method Selection
Application Preset
Frequency Reference Selection 1
Run Command Selection 1
Stopping Method Selection
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Frequency Reference 1
Jog Frequency Reference
Input Voltage Setting
Maximum Output Frequency
No.
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
E2-01
E2-04
E2-11
H4-02
H4-12
H4-22
H4-32
L1-01
L3-04
Name
Maximum Voltage
Base Frequency
Minimum Output Frequency
Base Voltage
Motor Rated Current
Number of Motor Poles
Motor Rated Power
Analog Output 1 Gain
Motor Overload Protection Selection
Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration
& Operation
No.
A1-02
A1-06
b1-01
b1-02
b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-17
E1-01
E1-04
117
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
4.4
Start-Up Flowcharts
The flowcharts in this section summarize basic steps required to start the drive. Use the flowcharts to determine the most
appropriate start-up method for a given application. The charts are intended as a quick reference to help familiarize the
user with start-up procedures.
Flowchart
A
Subchart
A-1
A-2
Objective
Basic startup procedure and motor tuning
Simple operation of induction motors using V/f control, or parallel operation of multiple
motors
High-performance operation using Open Loop Vector (OLV) or Closed Loop Vector (CLV)
induction motor control
Page
118
119
120
Flowchart A: Basic Start-up and Motor Tuning

Flowchart A describes a basic start-up sequence. This sequence varies slightly depending on the application. Use drive
default parameter settings in simple applications that do not require high precision.
Figure 4.8
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2, and 3.
Measure the insulation of the transformer.
Turn on the control power.
Check from this display (control board) whether the status is normal.
Set the control mode in parameter A1-02.
Set the basic parameters

b1-01/02 for frequency reference and Run command source selection
H1-, H2-, H3-, H4- for I/O terminal setting
d1- for multi-step speed references if used
Enter the settings for acceleration/deceleration and S-curve characteristics at C1-
and C2-.
Control Mode
A1-02 =
0: V/f
2: OLV
3: CLV
To
Flowchart A-2
To
Flowchart A-1
From Flowchart A-1, A-2
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 4.8 Basic Start-up
118
Subchart A-1: Simple Motor Setup Using V/f Control, or Serial Operation of Multiple
Motors
Subchart A-1 describes the setup procedure when using V/f Control. The flowchart below describes simple motor setup
for V/f Control without PG feedback. V/f Control is suited to applications like fans and pumps.
Figure 4.9
From
Flowchart
A
Enter the number of motor poles for E2-04.
Turn on the main circuit power.
Is
the motor
cable longer than 50
meters?
YES
<1>
NO
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for

Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2).
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor.

Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Return to
Flowchart
A
<1> When running multiple motors, Auto-Tuning is not possible.
& Operation
Figure 4.9 Simple Motor Setup Using V/f Control, or Serial Operation of Multiple Motors
119
Subchart A-2: High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV

Subchart A-2 describes the setup procedure when using Open Loop Vector Control or Closed Loop Vector Control.
Vector control is appropriate for applications requiring a high starting torque and torque limits.
Note: Although the drive sets parameters for the PG encoder during Auto-Tuning, sometimes the direction of the motor and direction
of the PG get reversed. Use parameter F1-05 to switch the direction of the PG so that it matches the motor direction.
Figure 4.10
From
Flowchart
A
YES
Possible for motor to

rotate during tuning?
<1>
NO
YES
Is the load less than

30% of the rated load
for the motor?
NO
Perform Rotational
Auto-Tuning (T1-01 = 0).
Is
the motor
cable longer than 50
meters?
YES
NO
Is there a PG encoder
on the motor?
Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning.

(T1-01 = 2)
NO
YES
Use the following functions?
Feed forward control
Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2 (L2-29 = 1)
Sequence input: KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.) (H1- = 7A)
Turn on the main circuit power.
Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Return to
Flowchart
A
<1> Check to see that the brake is released.

Figure 4.10 High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV
120
4.5 Power Up and Checking the Operation Display Status
4.5
Power Up and Checking the Operation Display Status
Power Up the Drive and Checking the Operation Display Status

Power Up
1. Turn the control power on, and check the digital operator to see if there are any faults.
2. Confirm the following before turning on the power supply.
Note: If a UPS is built-in, turn the power to the UPS on before turning on the control power. As a measure against overdischarge, also
be sure to turn the UPS off after turning off the control power.
Item to Check
Description
Confirm that the power supply voltage of the main circuit is correct.
2-kV class: Three-phase, 2400 V (60 Hz 5%)
3-kV class: Three-phase, 3300 V (50 Hz 5% or 60 Hz 5%)
4-kV class: Three-phase, 4160 V (60 Hz 5%)
Power supply voltage of main circuit 6-kV class: Three-phase, 6600 V (50 Hz 5% or 60 Hz 5%)
11-kV class: Three-phase, 11000 V (50 Hz 5% or 60 Hz 5%)
Confirm that the input terminals R, S and T of the main circuits power supply are securely
connected.
Confirm that the drive and motor are grounded properly.
Confirm that the drive output terminals (U, V, and W) are surely connected to the motor
Connection between drive output
terminals and motor terminals
terminals (U, V, and W).
Confirm that the drive control circuit terminals are surely connected to the terminals of other
Connection of drive control circuit
terminals
controller.
Status of drive control terminals
Confirm that all the drive control circuit terminals are turned OFF (drive is inactive).
Load status
Confirm that the motor is in no-load state (not connected to the machine system).
Checking the Display Status

When the power is turned on, the digital operator display in the normal status reads as follows.
No
Normal
Operation
Name
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Fault
Description
The monitoring of frequency reference is displayed in the data display area.
ALARM
- MODE - DRV
Er-12
STOP key
FWD RESET
The display content depends on the details of fault. Take appropriate measures by
referring to Troubleshooting on page 135.
lights.
& Operation
(Example: Current detection fault)
121
4.6 Auto-Tuning
4.6
Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Type
Select the optimal Auto-Tuning based on the conditions such as your application, control mode of the drive, and
installation environment of the motor. When selecting the Auto-Tuning to run, refer to the flowcharts shown in Start-Up
Flowcharts on page 118.
Note: The Auto-Tuning parameters valid for the control mode set for A1-02 are shown.
Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

This feature sets the following parameters for induction motors automatically.
Motor parameters E1- and E2- (E3-, E4- for motor 2)
F1- parameters for speed feedback detection (only when Closed Loop Vector Control is set)
Table 4.6 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Type
Parameter
Setting
Rotational Auto-Tuning
T1-01 = 0
Stationary Auto-Tuning
for Line-to-Line
Resistance
T1-01 = 2
Control Mode to Be
Applied
Application Condition and Benefit

The motor can turn around during the Auto-Tuning:
This allows the most precise control of the motor.
Running with constant output
Tunes the drive after the cable between the drive and
motor has been replaced with a cable over 50 m long.
Assumes Auto-Tuning has already been performed.
Drive and motor capacities differ.
Open Loop Vector Control

Closed Loop Vector Control
V/f Control
Open Loop Vector Control
Closed Loop Vector Control
Set the data indicated in Table 4.7 before starting Auto-Tuning.

The information required for setting can be found on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report. For details on the
procedure for Auto-Tuning, refer to Subchart A-1: Simple Motor Setup Using V/f Control, or Serial Operation of
Multiple Motors on page 119 or Subchart A-2: High Performance Operation Using OLV or CLV on page 120.
Table 4.7 Input Data for Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Input Data
Motor Rated Power
Motor Rated Voltage
Motor Rated Current
Motor Base Frequency
Number of Motor Pole
Motor Base Speed
PG Number of Pulses Per
Revolution
Motor No-Load Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor Iron Loss
Auto-Tuning Type (T1-01)

Auto-Tuning for
Rotational Auto-Tuning (0)
Line-to-Line Resistance (2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Parameter
Units
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
kW
V
A
Hz
min-1
T1-08
<1>
No
T1-09
T1-10
T1-11
A
Hz
W
No
No
No
No
No
No
<1> Set this when Closed Loop Vector control is selected.
122
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Before Auto-Tuning the Drive

Check the items below before Auto-Tuning the drive.
Basic Auto-Tuning Preparations
The Auto-Tuning provides the function to automatically check the motors electrical parameters. It is basically
different from the Auto-Tuning provided by the servo system (function to check the amount of load).
Auto-Tuning requires the user to input data from the motor nameplate or motor test report. Make sure this data is
available before Auto-Tuning the drive.
Note: For best performance, the drive input supply voltage must be greater than the motor rated voltage.
To cancel Auto-Tuning, press

on the digital operator.
Table 4.8 shows the sequence input and output terminal operation while Auto-Tuning is being executed.
Table 4.8 Sequence Input and Output Operation During Auto-Tuning
Tuning Mode
Sequence Input Function
Rotational Auto-Tuning
Disabled
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-toLine Resistance
Disabled
Sequence Output Function

Functions the same as during normal
operation
Maintains the status at the start of AutoTuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If installed, do not release the mechanical brake during stationary Auto-Tuning. Inadvertent
brake release may cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel. Ensure that the mechanical brake release circuit
is not controlled by the drive multi-function digital outputs.
Note: To run the Rotational Auto-Tuning, be sure to disconnect the motor from the machine and check to see that there is nothing
dangerous even if the motor starts to turn around. It could result in a failure of the drive. When the rotational Auto-Tuning is
performed for load-connected motor, the motor parameter could not be calculated accurately and the motor could run unusually.
Notes on Rotational Auto-Tuning

To achieve optimal performance from Rotational Auto-Tuning, the load should be decoupled from the motor.
Rotational Auto-Tuning is best suited for applications requiring high performance over a wide speed range.
If motor and load can not be decoupled, reduce the load so that it is no greater than 30% of the rated load. Performing
Rotational Auto-Tuning with a higher load will set motor parameters incorrectly, and can cause irregular motor
rotation.
Ensure the motor-mounted brake is fully released if installed.
Connected machinery should be allowed to rotate the motor.
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or
will appear on the digital operator.
is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and a fault code
Figure 4.11
A
ALARM
- A.TUNE
- DRV Rdy
DRV FOUT
DRV
REV
- MODE -
ALARM
DRV
Tune-Proceeding
X.XX Hz/ X.XA
Er-12
I-det.Circuit
A During the Auto-Tuning
FWD RESET
& Operation

FWD
B Auto-Tuning Aborted
Figure 4.11 Auto-Tuning Aborted Display
123
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Operation Example

The operation procedure based on the example of the Rotational Auto-Tuning is described below. Check that the A102 setting (Control Mode Selection) is set to 3 (Closed Loop Vector Control).
Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning
Operating Procedure
1
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Press the
or
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE PRG
Auto-Tuning
key until the Auto-Tuning display appears.
AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode Sel
Press
to begin setting parameters.
T1-01= 0 0
Standard Tuning
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode Sel
Press
Save the setting by pressing
to select the value for T1-01. <1>
T1-01= 0 0
Standard Tuning
0
FWD
Entry Accepted
- A.TUNE - PRG
Tuning Mode Sel
The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3.
T1-01= 0 0
Standard Tuning
ESC FWD DATA
<1> T1-00 will appear on the display when one of the multi-function inputs has been set to switch between motor 1 and motor 2 (H1- =
16).
Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning.
Operating Procedure
LCD Display
to access the motor output power parameter T1-02.
T1-02= 20000kW
(0 ~ 65000)
20000kW
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
Press
Press
on.
Press F1 , F2 ,
nameplate data in kW.
Press
The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1.
to display the value set in E2-11 (Motor Rated Power) at power
and
to enter the motor power
to save the setting.
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 20000kW
(0 ~ 65000)
20000kW
FWD
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 25000kW
(0 ~ 65000)
25000kW
FWD
Entry Accepted
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Power
124
T1-02= 25000kW
(0 ~ 65000)
25000kW
ESC FWD DATA
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Operating Procedure
LCD Display
- A.TUNE - PRG
Rated Voltage
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters:

T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage
T1-04, Motor Rated Current
T1-05, Motor Base Frequency
T1-06, Number of Motor Poles
T1-07, Motor Base Speed
T1-08 (PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution)
T1-03= 4000VAC
(0 ~ 13000)
4000VAC
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Mtr Rated Slip
T1-07= 1750RPM
(0 ~ 24000)
1750RPM
ESC FWD DATA
Note: To execute Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance, set parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in
death or serious injury. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with AutoTuning.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning is performed even
with the motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning has been
completed.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is engaged on the load. Failure to comply could result in
drive malfunction. Ensure the motor can freely spin before beginning Auto-Tuning.
NOTICE: Do not run the Rotational Auto-Tuning for load-connected motor. When the Rotational Auto-Tuning is performed for loadconnected motor, the motor parameter could not be calculated accurately and the motor could run unusually. Disconnect the
motor from the load.
Enter the required data from the motor nameplate. Press
to proceed to the Auto-Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate.
Operating Procedure
LCD Display
- A.TUNE - DRV
Auto-Tuning
After entering the data listed on the motor nameplate, press
Press
2
RUN
to confirm.
0.00 Hz/ 0.0A

Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
ESC FWD
to activate Auto-Tuning.
- A.TUNE - DRV Rdy
Tune Proceeding
lights. After about one minute during which current flows without rotation,
the motor starts rotating.
Note: The tens digit of TUn 10 indicates the setting for T1-00 (Motor 1/
2 Selection). The units digit indicates the setting for T1-01 (AutoTuning Mode Selection).
X.XX Hz/ X.XA

FWD
- MODE -
Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes.
DRV
End
Tune Successful
FWD RESET
& Operation
Parameter Settings during Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

The T1- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data.
Note: For motors that are to be operated in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with the base data. After AutoTuning is complete, change the maximum frequency E1-04 to the desired value.
Parameter Settings during Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

Selects the motor to be tuned when motor 1/2 switching is enabled, i.e., a digital input is set for function H1- = 16.
This parameter is not displayed if motor 1/2 switching is disabled.
No.
T1-00
Name
Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection
Setting Range
1 or 2
Default
1
125
4.6 Auto-Tuning
Setting 1: Motor 1
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E1- and E2- for motor 1.

Setting 2: Motor 2
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E3- and E4- for motor 2. Make sure that motor 2 is connected to the
drive for Auto-Tuning.
T1-01: Auto-Tuning Mode Selection
Sets the type of Auto-Tuning to be used. Auto-Tuning Type on page 122 for details on the different types of AutoTuning.
Note: When running multiple motors, Auto-Tuning is not possible.
No.
T1-01
Name
Auto-Tuning Mode Selection
Setting Range
2 (V/f)
0, 2 (OLV, CLV)
Default
2 (V/f)
0 (OLV, CLV)
Setting 0: Rotational Auto-Tuning

Setting 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
T1-02 Motor Rated Capacity

Sets the rated capacity of the motor according to the value on the motor nameplate.
No.
T1-02
Name
Motor Rated Power
Setting Range
0 to 65000 kW
Default
Determined by o2-04
T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage (T1-01 = 0, 1, 3, 4)

Sets the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate value. If the motor to be operated above its base speed,
enter the voltage at base speed here.
For better control precision around rated speed when using a vector control mode, it can be helpful to enter the no-load
voltage for the motor here. The motors no-load voltage refers to the voltage needed to operate the motor under no-load
conditions at rated speed. The no-load voltage can usually be found in the motor test report available from the
manufacturer. If no data is available, enter approximately 90% of the rated voltage printed on the motor nameplate.
No.
T1-03
Name
Motor Rated Voltage
Setting Range
0 to 13000 V
Default
Determined by A1-02
and o2-04
T1-04: Motor Rated Current

Sets the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate value. For optimal performance in OLV or CLV, the motor
rated current should be between 50 and 100% of the drive rated current. Enter the current at the motor base speed.
No.
T1-04
Name
Motor Rated Current
Setting Range
(n9-01) 0.1 to (n9-01)
2
Default
Determined by o2-04
T1-05: Motor Base Frequency

Sets the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is used
or the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the maximum frequency to E1-04 (E3-04 for motor 2) after AutoTuning is complete.
No.
T1-05
126
Name
Motor Base Frequency
Setting Range
0.0 to 120.0 Hz
Default
60.0 Hz
4.6 Auto-Tuning
T1-06: Number of Motor Poles (T1-01 = 0)
Sets the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate value.
No.
T1-06
Name
Number of Motor Poles
Setting Range
2 to 48
Default
4
T1-07: Motor Base Speed (T1-01 = 0)

Used to set the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate value.
No.
T1-07
Name
Motor Base Speed
Setting Range
0 to 24000 min-1
Default
1750 min-1
T1-08: PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution (T1-01 = 0)

Sets the number of pulses from the PG encoder. Set the actual number of pulses for one full motor rotation.
T1-08 will only be displayed in CLV.
Name
PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution
Setting Range
0 to 60000 ppr
Default
600 ppr
& Operation
No.
T1-08
127
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run
4.7
No-Load Operation Test Run
No-Load Operation Test Run

This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor decoupled from the load during a test run.
Before Starting the Motor
Check the following items before operation:
Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions have been taken.
During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
No-Load Operation Instructions
The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note: Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Operating Procedure
1
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
ALARM
- MODE DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz
LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1
LO
Press the RE
key to select LOCAL.
The LO/RE light will turn on.
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
RUN
STOP
Off
On
ALARM
DRV Rdy
- MODE FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 6.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz
LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1
RUN to give the drive a Run command.

Press
RUN will light and the motor will rotate at 6 Hz.
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
RUN
RUN
Off
STOP
RUN
On
Motor
Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that no faults or alarms
occur.
Forward
128
If there is no error in step 4, press

to increase the frequency reference.
Increase the frequency in increments of 10 Hz, verifying smooth operation at all
speeds. For each frequency, check the drive output current using monitor U1-03.
The current should be well below the motor rated current.
Example: 6 Hz 60 Hz
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run

Operating Procedure
LCD Display
ALARM
DRV Rdy
- MODE FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 50.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz
LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1
The drive should operate normally. Press

to stop the motor.
RUN flashes until the motor comes to a complete stop.
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
RUN
RUN
RUN
On
& Operation
Flash
STOP
129
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected
4.8
Test Run with Load Connected
Test Run with the Load Connected

After performing a no-load test run, connect the motor and proceed to run the motor and load together.
Notes on Connected Machinery
Clear the area around the motor.
The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are held in place.
Checklist Before Running Machinery
Confirm that the Fast Stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
Be ready to press
in case of emergency.
Checklist Before Operation
Confirm that the motor should rotate in the proper direction.
Confirm that the motor acceleration and deceleration should produce smooth machine operation.
Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions
Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery to the motor.
Watch monitor parameter U1-03 during operation to ensure there is no overcurrent.
If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor direction and the frequency
reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or vibration.
Correct any problems that occur with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related issues.
130
4.9 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes
4.9
Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes
Use the verify mode to check all changes to parameter settings. Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on
page 115.
Confirm that the parameter setting is correctly configured, and save the setting. Changing the parameter access level and
setting a password are also possible to prevent the set parameters from being carelessly changed.
User Parameter Default Value (o2-03)

The changed parameter can be saved in the drive by setting o2-03 (User Parameter Default Value) to 1 (Set defaults.
Saves parameter settings as default values for a User Initialization.). After the parameter setting is saved, the set value of
o2-03 returns to 0 (No change) automatically. The set value of A1-03 (Initialize Parameters) automatically displays
1110 (User initialize), and initialization by user parameter set values becomes enabled.
No.
Name
o2-03
User Parameter Default

Value
A1-03
Initialize Parameters
Description
Saves/clears the default values used for A1-03 (Initialize
Parameters).
0: No change
1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a
User Initialization.
2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved
for a User Initialization
After the user parameter set values are saved, 1110 (User
initialize) can be selected from A1-03 (Initialize Parameters).
Selects a method to initialize the parameter.
0: No initializing
1110: User initialize
(User parameter set values must have been saved using o203.)
2220: Initialization with 2-wire sequence
(set the parameters to default setting)
Setting
Range
Default
0 to 2
0 to 5550
Access Level of Parameter (A1-01)

It is possible to display only A1- and U- by setting A1-01 (Access level of parameter) to 0 (Monitoring
only). After that, parameter setting change becomes disabled.
No.
A1-01
Description
Setting
Range
Default
Selects an access level of parameter (set/monitor).

0: Operation only
(Set and monitor A1-01 and A1-04. U- parameters can
also be monitored.)
1: User parameters
(Only the parameters A2-01 to A2-16 for each application and
the recently changed parameters A2-17 to A2-32 can be set up
and monitored.)
2: Advanced Access
(Can set and monitor all parameters)
0 to 2
Name
Access Level of Parameter
& Operation
Also, when A1-01 (Access level of parameter) is set to 1 (User parameter), only the parameters registered in the user
parameter of A2 are to be displayed, so only the parameters necessary for the machine and application can be displayed.
131

No.
Name
A2-01
to
A2-32
User Parameters 1 to 32
A2-33
User Parameter Automatic

Selection
Description
Function that automatically saves the parameters and their
values edited recently and allows the user to select the
parameters that are used frequently.
When A2-33 is set to 1, the parameters and their values
edited recently are automatically selected for A2-17 through
A2-32 in sequence. (A2-01 through A2-16 must be set
manually.)
When A2-33 is 0, automatic selection of edited parameters
is not performed. Users must register all in A2-01 through A232.
0: Do not save list of recently viewed parameters. (Parameters
of A2-01 through A2-32 must be selected by the user.)
1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. (Recently
edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32. The
most recently edited parameters are automatically selected for
A2-17. Those edited after the most recently edited parameters
are selected for A2-18.)
Setting
Range
Default
b1-01 to
o-
0, 1
Password (A1-04, A1-05)

If a password is set in A1-05, the password must be verified by A1-04. Validate and enter correct password. Otherwise,
parameters A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-33 cannot be changed.
Note: A1-05 is normally not displayed. To display and configure settings, display A1-04, and press
digital operator.
while pressing
of the
Copy Function
The drives parameter setting can be copied into other drive using the digital operator of main body or optional device.
This allows you to easily save the parameter setting and set up multiple drives.
Digital Operator (supplied with this product)
This enables to read/copy/verify the parameters in addition to the basic operation of the drive.
For more information on the operation procedure, refer to Operation Procedure of Copy Function (Digital Operator)
on page 133.
USB Copy Unit
Allows you to connect to the drive, read the drives parameter setting, and copy the setting into other drive. Refer to the
USB Copy Unit Installation Manual for details of operation procedure.
Note: Connect to the drives operator connector.
CopyUnitManager
Allows you to manage multiple parameter settings read with the USB Copy Unit. This increases the efficiency of
writing parameters to drives of different capacities and different models.
For more information on the operating procedure, refer to the operation manual for the CopyUnitManager.
DriveWizard Plus MV
This is a computer software package used for drive parameter management, monitoring and self-diagnosis.
Allows you to load/save parameter settings, and to copy them to other drives.
For more information on the operating procedure, refer to the operation manual supplied with the DriveWizard Plus
MV software.
132

Operation Procedure of Copy Function (Digital Operator)
The digital operator allows the operations below by changing the drives parameter o3-01 (Copy Function Selection):
INV OP READ (o3-01 = 1)
Reads out the parameter setting from the drive to store the setting in the digital operator. The digital operator can store the
parameters of one drive.
Note: The number of the read operations of the digital operator is limited. As a guide, the maximum number of times of read operations
available is about 100,000 times.
OP INV WRITE (o3-01 = 2)
Copies parameter settings from the digital operator, writing them to other drives.
OP INV VERIFY (o3-01 = 3)
Verifies parameter settings on the drive to check if they match the data saved on the digital operator.
The read procedure is described below.
Note: When performing read, o3-02 (Copy Allowed Selection) must be set to 1 (Enabled). Setting o3-02 = 0 can protect the
parameters saved in the operator.
Operating Procedure
LCD Display
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Turn on the power supply.
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Initial setting screen
or
to display the parameter setting mode screen, and then press
HELP FWD DATA
Select o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) by
or
, and press
Press
example.
-PRMSET- PRG
Copy Function Sel
o3-01= 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
or
to select an operation. Select 01 (INV OP Read) in this
Press
After the operation finishes, the screen automatically returns to the copy function
selection screen.
to starts the operation.
FWD
-PRMSET- PRG
Copy Function Sel
o3-01= 1 *0*
INVOP READ
0
FWD
- MODE PRG
Programming
READ
INVOP READING
End
READ COMPLETE
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF(OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Press
until the screen returns to the initial screen.
& Operation
Press
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Initial setting screen
133
134
5
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms, errors, related displays, and
guidance for troubleshooting. Also, describes the problems arising from faults of the drive
and motor and the measures against them. This chapter can also serve as a reference guide for
tuning the drive during a trial run.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOTOR PERFORMANCE FINE-TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYPES OF FAULTS, ALARMS, AND ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULT DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED INDICATORS ON THE CONTROLLER AND CCB
(CELL CONTROL BOARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 COPY FUNCTION RELATED DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 TROUBLESHOOTING WITHOUT FAULT DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
138
141
146
158
167
171
174
176
178
180
135
5.1 Section Safety
5.1
Section Safety
DANGER


Do not open the drive panel doors while main circuit power is on.
Incorrect handling could result in an electric shock. Make sure that the drive panel doors are closed before turning on
the input power supply.
The diagrams in this section may be indicated with the doors open to show details. Be sure to close the doors before
operating the drive and run the drive it in accordance with the instructions in this manual.
WARNING

Improper equipment grounding could result in death, serious injury or fire by contacting the motor case.
Do not carry out maintenance or inspection work while the power for the main circuit and controls is on.

precautions should be taken to prevent burns.
When replacing the cooling fan, shut off the main circuit's power and then wait at least 15 minutes. Then, shut off the
control circuit's power and make sure that the cooling fan has fully stopped before starting the work.


work on the drive.
Fire Hazard

Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming drive input power before applying power.
Do not use improper combustible materials.

Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
136
5.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.

Never disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.


Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive.
Troubleshooting
137
5.2 Motor Performance Fine-Tuning
5.2
Motor Performance Fine-Tuning
This section offers helpful information for counteracting oscillation, hunting, or other problems that occur while
performing a trial run. Refer to the section below that corresponds to the motor control method used.
Note: This section describes parameters that are commonly edited and may be set incorrectly. Consult Yaskawa for more information
on detailed settings and fine-tuning the drive.
Fine-Tuning V/f Control

Table 5.1 Parameters for Fine-Tuning Performance in V/f
Problem
Parameter No.
Corrective Action
Default
If insufficient motor torque relative to the size of the load

causes hunting, reduce the setting.
Motor hunting and
When motor hunting and oscillation occur with a light
Hunting Prevention
oscillation at speeds
load, increase the setting.
1.00
Gain Setting(n1-02)
between 10 and 40 Hz
Lower this setting if hunting occurs when using a motor
with a larger frame size, or a motor with relatively low
inductance.
Poor torque or speed
Torque
If motor torque and speed response are too slow, decrease
response
Compensation
the setting.
200 ms
Motor hunting and
Primary Delay Time
If motor hunting and oscillation occur, increase the setting.
oscillation
(C4-02)
Poor motor torque at
If torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz, increase the
Torque
speeds below 10 Hz
setting.
1.00
Compensation Gain
Motor hunting and
If motor hunting and oscillation with a relatively light
(C4-01)
oscillation
load, decrease the setting.
Mid Output
Poor motor torque at low Frequency Voltage If torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz, increase the
speeds
(E1-08)
setting.
E1-08: <1>
E1-10: <1>
Motor instability at
Minimum Output If the motor exhibits excessive instability at start-up,
motor start
Frequency Voltage reduce the setting.
(E1-10)
Slip Compensation After setting the motor-rated current (E2-01), motor-rated
0.0 (no slip
Poor speed precision
Gain
slip (E2-02), and motor no-load current (E2-03), adjust the
compensation)
(C3-01)
slip compensation gain (C3-01).
Suggested
Setting
0.10 to 2.00
100 to 1000
ms
0.50 to 1.50
3% of the
motor rated
voltage
0.5 to 1.5
<1> Determined by o2-04 (Drive Model Selection)
Fine-Tuning Open Loop Vector Control

Table 5.2 Parameters for Fine-Tuning Performance in OLV
Problem
Poor motor torque and
speed response
Motor hunting and
between 10 and 40 Hz

speed response
Motor hunting and
between 10 and 40Hz
138
Parameter No.
Speed Feedback
Detection Control
(AFR) Gain(n2-01)
Corrective Action
Default
If motor torque and speed response are too slow, gradually

decrease the setting by 0.05.
1.00
If motor hunting and oscillation occur, gradually increase
the setting by 0.05.
To improve motor torque speed response, gradually reduce

this setting by 10 ms and check the performance.
If motor hunting and oscillation occur as a result of load
Speed Feedback
inertia, gradually increase the setting by 50 ms and check
Detection Control
250 ms
the performance.
(AFR) Time Constant
Note: Ensure that n2-02 n2-03.When
1(n2-02)
changing n2-02, set C4-02 (Torque
Compensation Primary Delay Time)
accordingly.
Suggested
Setting
0.50 to 2.00
50 to 2000
ms

Problem
Parameter No.
Speed Feedback
Detection Control
(AFR) Time Constant
2(n2-03)
Overvoltage trips when
accelerating, decelerating,
or during sudden speed or
load changes.
Torque Compensation
Primary Delay Time 2
(C4-06)

speed response
Motor hunting and
oscillation
Torque Compensation
Primary Delay
Time(C4-02)
Poor speed response and

stability
Slip Compensation
Primary Delay
Time(C3-02)
Slip Compensation
Gain (C3-01)
Poor motor torque at low

speeds
Poor speed response
Motor instability at start
Mid Output
Frequency Voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum Output
Frequency Voltage
(E1-10)
Corrective Action
If overvoltage trips occur, gradually increase this setting
by 50 ms.
If response is slow, gradually reduce this setting by 10 ms.
Note: Ensure that n2-02 n2-03.When making
adjustments to n2-03, increase the value
of C4-06 (Torque Compensation Primary
Delay Time 2) proportionally.
If overvoltage trips occur, gradually increase this setting
by 10 ms and check the performance.
If response is slow, gradually reduce this setting by 2 ms
and check the performance.
Note: Ensure that C4-02 C4-06.When
changing C4-06 (Torque Compensation
Primary Delay Time 2), increase the value
of n2-03 proportionally.
If motor torque and speed response are too slow, gradually
reduce this setting by 2 ms.
If motor hunting and oscillation occur, gradually increase
this setting by 10 ms.
Note: Ensure that C4-02 C4-06.When making
adjustments to C4-02, increase the AFR
time constant 1 (n2-02) proportionally.
If response is slow, gradually decrease the setting by 10
ms.
If speed is unstable, gradually increase the setting by 10
ms.
If speed is too slow, gradually increase the setting by 0.1
ms.
If speed is too fast, gradually decrease the setting by 0.1
ms.
If motor torque and speed response are too slow, increase
the setting.
If the motor exhibits excessive instability at start-up,
reduce the setting.
Note: When working with a relatively light
load, increasing this value too much can
result in overtorque.
Default
Suggested
Setting
750 ms
750 to 2000
ms
150 ms
150 to 750
ms
200 ms
20 to 100
ms <1>
200 ms
100 to 500
ms
E1-08: <1>
E1-10: <1>
0.5 to 1.5
1% of the
motor rated
voltage
<1> Determined by o2-04 (Drive Model Selection)
When using the Open Loop Vector Control, leave the torque compensation gain (C4-01) at its default setting of 1.00.
In the Open Loop Vector Control, when the speed precision is not improved for regenerative operation, enable slip
compensation during regeneration by setting parameter C3-04 = 1.
Fine-Tuning Closed Loop Vector Control

Table 5.3 Parameters for Fine-Tuning the Performance in CLV

speed response
Motor hunting and
oscillation

speed response
Motor hunting and
oscillation
Parameter No.
<High speed side>
ASR Proportional Gain 1
(C5-01)
<Low speed side>
ASR Proportional Gain 2
(C5-03) <1>
<High speed side>
ASR Integral Time 1
(C5-02)
<Low speed side>
ASR Integral Time 2
(C5-04) <1>
Corrective Action
Default
Suggested
Setting
If motor torque and speed response are too slow,

gradually increase the setting by 5.
If motor hunting and oscillation occur, decrease the
setting.
20.00
10.00 to
50.00

decrease the setting.
If motor hunting and oscillation occur, increase the
setting.
0.500 s
0.300 to
1.000 s
Troubleshooting
Problem
139

Problem
Parameter No.
Trouble maintaining the

ASR proportional gain or
the integral time at the low
or high end of the speed
range
ASR Gain Switching

Frequency (C5-07) <1>
Corrective Action
Have the drive switch between two different ASR

proportional gain and integral time settings based on the 0.0 Hz
output frequency.

ASR Primary Delay Time gradually decrease the setting by 0.01.
If the load is less rigid and subject to oscillation,
Constant (C5-06) <1>
increase this setting.
Motor hunting and

oscillation
Default
0.004 s
Suggested
Setting
0.0 to max
output
frequency
0.004 to
0.020 s
<1> For more information about Speed Control (ASR), refer to the description of the Speed Control (C5-) parameters in the separate
FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide (EZZ010930).
Parameters to Minimize Motor Hunting and Oscillation

In addition to the parameters discussed on page Table 5.4 through Table 5.5, the following parameters indirectly affect
motor hunting and oscillation.
Table 5.4 Parameters that Affect Control Performance in Applications
Parameter No.
Dwell Function
(b6-01 through b6-04)
Droop function
(b7-01, b7-02)
Accel/Decel Time
(C1-01 through C1-11)
S-Curve characteristics
(C2-01 to C2-04)
Jump Frequency
(d3-01 through d3-04)
Analog input filter time
constant
(H3-13)
Application
Prevents motor speed loss by maintaining the output frequency when working with heavy loads or when
there is powerful backlash on the machine side.
Set to moderate motor torque, and to balance the load level between two motors.
(Enabled when Control Mode A1-02 = 3)
Adjusting accel and decel times will affect the torque presented to the motor during acceleration or
deceleration.
Prevents shock at the start of acceleration/deceleration and on completion of acceleration/deceleration.
Skips over the resonant frequencies of connected machinery.
Prevents fluctuation in analog input signals due to noise.
Prevents motor speed loss and overvoltage. Used when the load is too heavy and also during sudden
Stall Prevention
(L3-01 through L3-06, L3-11) acceleration/deceleration.
Adjustment is not normally required because Stall Prevention is enabled as a default.
Set the maximum torque for Open Loop Vector Control.
Torque Limits
(L7-01 through L7-04, L3-06, Ensure that the drive capacity is greater than the motor capacity when increasing this setting. Be careful
L3-07)
when reducing this value because motor speed loss may occur with heavy loads.
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low
machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio
Feed Forward Control
(n5-01 to n5-03)
between the load and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be set. (Enabled
when Control Mode A1-02 = 3)
140
5.3 Types of Faults, Alarms, and Errors
5.3
Types of Faults, Alarms, and Errors
Types of Faults, Alarms, and Errors

Check the digital operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using the
Digital Operator on page 107.
When troubles still remain after consulting this section, confirm the following items in advance and contact your
Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
Drive model
Software version
The serial number stated on the nameplate (SER NO.)
Date of purchase
Description of the problem
Table 5.5 describes alarms, faults and errors that may occur during operation of the drive.
Table 5.5 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Drive Faults
Power Cell Faults
Minor Faults and Alarms
Operator Programming
Error
Auto-Tuning Errors
Copy Function Errors
Drive Response
Drive faults are detected by the control panel. Power Cell faults are detected by the Power Cell control
circuit and transmitted to the control panel.
When the drive detects a fault:
The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit
until the fault is reset.
The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Some faults allow the user to select how the drive should stop when the fault occurs.
Fault output terminals 30-31 will close, and 32-33 will open.
The drive will remain inoperable until that fault has been cleared. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on
page 179 for the reset operations.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator
LED flashes.
The drive generally continues running the motor, although some alarms allow the user to select a
stopping method when the alarm occurs.
One of the sequence outputs closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2- = 10), but not by an
alarm.
To reset the a minor fault or alarm, remove whatever is causing the problem.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or an option card is not properly connected, it results in
an operator programming error. When the drive detects an operator programming error, the status
described below comes into effect.
The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error, and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
Sequence outputs do not operate.
The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the
Operator Programming Error to clear the error.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning. When the drive detects a tuning error:
Motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
These are the types of errors that can occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy,
read, or verify parameter settings.
Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Find out what is causing the problem (such as
model incompatibility) and try again.
Troubleshooting
Type
141
Fault, Alarm and Error Displays

Faults (Drive Faults and Power Cell Faults)
When the drive detects a fault, the code indicated by the digital operator lights continuously rather than flashing, and the
ALM indicator LED also lights continuously. A flashing indication means a minor fault or alarm; refer to Minor Faults
and Alarms on page 143 in this case. To give an example, there are two types of indication for oS (Overspeed), one
being a fault and the other a minor fault.
Table 5.6 Fault Displays (1)
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Digital Operator
Display
GF
Ground Fault
151
IOV
Input Overvoltage
152
LF
Output Phase Loss
152
bUS
Option Communication Error
146
CE
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communication Error
146
CF
CFA
nn coF <1>
CFA
nn CUV <1>
CFA
nn FU <1>
CFA
nn IGBT_FLT <1>
CFA
nn OC <1>
CFA
nn OH <1>
CFA
nn OH1 <1>
CFA
nn OV <1>
CFA
nn OV2 <1>
CFA
nn THBOW <1>
CFA
nn VCF_OV <1>
Control Fault
146
Current Offset Fault
147
Undervoltage
147
Fuse Blowout
147
IGBT Fault
147
Overcurrent
147
IGBT Overheating
148
IGBT Overheating 1
148
Overvoltage 1
148
Overvoltage 2
148
Thermistor Disconnect
148
Main Circuit Capacitor Neutral

Point Potential Error
148
CPF00, CPF01 <2> Control Circuit Error
149
CPF02
A/D Conversion Error
149
CPF06
EEPROM Memory Data Error
149
CPF20, CPF21 <2> Control Circuit Error
149
Name
CCB-MB Communication Error

LIN
nn LINK FAULT <1> (Link Fault)
Option Card Fault at Option Port
oFA00
CN5-A
Option Card Error Occurred at
oFA01, oFA02
Option Port CN5-A
oFA03 to oFA06
Option Port CN5-A
oFA10, oFA11
Option Port CN5-A
oFA12 to oFA17
CN5-A
oFA30 to oFA43
Option Port CN5-A
oFb00
CN5-B
oFb01, oFb02
Option Port CN5-B
oFb03 to oFb11
Option Port CN5-B
oFb12 to oFb17
CN5-B
oFC00
CN5-C
Page
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
153
153
153
153
153
oFC01, oFC02

Option Port CN5-C
153
oFC03 to oFC11

Option Port CN5-C
153
oFC12 to oFC17

CN5-C
153
oL1
Motor Overload
154
oL2
Drive Overload
154
oL3
Overtorque Detection 1
154
oL4
155
CPF22
Hybrid IC Error
149
CPF23
Control Board Connection Error
149
Control Circuit Error
149
dEv
Speed Deviation (for Control Mode

with PG)
149
EF0
Option Card External Fault
150
oL5
Mechanical Weakening Detection 1
155
External Fault (input terminal)
150
OOV
Output Overvoltage
155
Err
EEPROM Write Error
151
oPr
Digital Operator Connection Fault
155
FAn
Fan Fault
151
FbH
Excessive PID Feedback
151
oS
Overspeed
(for Control Mode with PG)
155
FbL
PID Feedback Loss
151
PGo
PG Disconnect
(for Control Mode with PG)
155
CPF26 to CPF35
CPF40 to CPF45
EF1 to EF16
142
Page

Table 5.7 Fault Displays (2)
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
TME2
Transformer Temperature DI Fault
156
Undertorque Detection 1
156
PG Hardware Fault
(detected when using a PG-X3
option card)
155
UL4
156
Too Many Speed Search Restarts
156
UL5
157
TME
Transformer Temperature Fault
156
Uv1
Undervoltage
157
TME1
Transformer Temperature Fault 1
156
VUB
Voltage Unbalance
157
PGoH
SEr
UL3
<1> The number of the Power Cell at which the fault has occurred is indicated at nn.
<2> When a fault occurred at the startup of the drive, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. When a fault occurred during operation, CPF01 or
CPF21 is displayed.
Minor Faults and Alarms

If an alarm is detected, the ALM LED will blink and the alarm code display flashes. If the ALM LED lights without
blinking, this means that a fault has been detected (not an alarm). Information on fault codes can be found in Faults
(Drive Faults and Power Cell Faults) on page 142.
Digital Operator
Display
Minor Fault Output

(H2- = 10)
Page
Battery Voltage Low
Yes
158
Drive Baseblock (Voltage)
No
158
Yes
158
Serial Communication Transmission Error
Yes
159
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
Yes
159
CrST
Cannot Reset
No
159
dEv
Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with PG)
Yes
159
dnE
Drive Disabled
Yes
160
EF
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
Yes
160
EF0
Yes
160
EF1
to
EF16
Yes
160
FAn
Fan Fault
Yes
161
FbH
Yes
161
FbL
PID Feedback Loss
Yes
161
IOV
Input Overvoltage
Yes
161
oH
IGBT Overheating
No
162
oH2
Drive Overheat Warning
Yes
162
oL1
Motor Overload
Yes
162
oL2
Drive Overload
Yes
163
oL3
Overtorque 1
Yes
163
oL4
Overtorque 2
Yes
163
oL5
Yes
163
BAT
bb
bUS
CALL
CE
Name
Troubleshooting
Table 5.8 Minor Fault and Alarm Displays
143

Digital Operator
Display
Minor Fault Output

(H2- = 10)
Page
Output Overvoltage
Yes
164
Overspeed (for Control Mode with PG)
Yes
164
PASS
MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
No
164
PGo
PG Disconnect (for Control Mode with PG)
Yes
164
PG Hardware Fault (detected when using a PG-X3 option card)
Yes
164
rUn
Motor Switch during Run
Yes
164
SE
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
Yes
164
Yes
165
UL3
Yes
165
UL4
Yes
165
UL5
Yes
165
Uv
Undervoltage
Yes
166
Voltage Unbalance
Yes
166
OOV
oS
PGoH
TMA1
VUB
144
Name

Operator Programming Errors
Table 5.9 Operator Programming Error Displays
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
oPE01
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
167
oPE08
Parameter Selection Error
169
oPE02
Parameter Range Setting Error
167
oPE09
PID Control Selection Fault
169
oPE03
Sequence Input Selection Error
167
oPE10
V/f Data Setting Error
170
oPE05
Run Command/Frequency
Reference Source Selection Error
168
oPE15
Torque Control Setting Error
170
oPE06
Control Method Selection Error
168
oPE18
Online Tuning Parameter Setting

Error
170
oPE07
Multi-Function Analog Input

Selection Error
169
Auto-Tuning Errors
Table 5.10 Auto-Tuning Error Displays
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
Digital Operator
Display
Name
Page
End1
Excessive V/f Setting
171
Er-03
STOP button Input
172
End2
Motor Iron Core Saturation

Coefficient Error
171
Er-04
Line-to-Line Resistance Error
172
End3
Rated Current Setting Alarm
171
Er-05
No-Load Current Error
172
End4
Adjusted Slip Calculation Error
171
Er-08
Rated Slip Error
172
End5
Resistance Tuning Error
171
Er-09
Acceleration Error
172
End7
No-Load Current Alarm
172
Er-10
Motor Direction Error
173
Er-01
Motor Data Error
172
Er-11
Motor Speed Fault
173
Er-02
Minor Fault
172
Er-12
Current Detection Error
173
Errors and Displays When Using the Copy Function

Table 5.11 Copy Errors
Name
Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)
Control Mode Mismatch
Error Writing Data
Copy Unit Error
Drive Model Mismatch
Task Complete
Communication Error
Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
Error Reading Data
Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)
Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same
Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing)
Page
176
176
176
176
176
176
176
177
177
177
177
177
177
Troubleshooting
Digital Operator Display

CoPy
CPEr
CPyE
CSEr
dFPS
End
iFEr
ndAT
rdEr
rEAd
vAEr
vFyE
vrFy
145
5.4 Fault Detection
5.4
Fault Detection
Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.12 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
bUS
Cause
No signal received from the PLC.
Faulty communications wiring or a short
circuit exists.
Fault Name
After establishing initial communication, the connection was lost.
Only detected when the run command or frequency reference is assigned to an option
card.
Possible Solution
Check for faulty wiring.
Correct the wiring.
Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed.
Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to the
A communications data error occurred due to MC coil.
noise.
Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the
drive input power side.
Separate all wiring for comm. devices from drive input power lines. Install an EMC
noise filter to the drive input power supply.
Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues
The option card is damaged.
to occur.
The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on
The option card is not properly connected to
the drive.
the drive.
Reinstall the option card.
Fault Name
CE
Cause
Faulty communications wiring or a short
circuit exists.
Communication data error occurred due to

noise.

Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
Possible Solution
Correct the wiring.
Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to the
MC coil.
Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the
drive input power side.
Separate all wiring for comm. devices from input power lines of the drive. Install an
EMC noise filter to the drive input power supply.
Fault Name
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer while ramping to stop
in Open Loop Vector Control.
Cause
Possible Solution
Motor parameters are not set properly.
Check the motor parameter settings and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Torque limit is set too low.
Set the torque limit to an appropriate value using parameters L7-01 to L7-04.
Adjust the deceleration time (C1-02, -04, -06, -08).
Load inertia is too big.
Set the frequency to the minimum value and interrupt the Run command when the drive
finishes decelerating.
The connection between motor and drive is
improper.
Correct the wiring.
The line-to-line resistance has not been tuned. Run the Auto-Tuning of line-to-line resistance.
The stopping method setting is not
The Run command fails to decelerate to a stop or is applied to unwanted machine.
appropriate.
The Run command is issued in the coast to
The stop command is issued after the motor stopped.
stop state.
Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1).
CF
146
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Current Offset Fault
CFA
The current offset value at the current detection circuit has exceeded the fault detection
nn coF
level.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cell control board fault
Replace the cell control board.
Current detection circuit fault
Replace the current detection circuit.
Fault Name
Undervoltage
CFA
nn CUV
The P side or N side voltage in the DC bus has fallen below the low voltage detection level.
Cause
Possible Solution
The Power Cell input voltage is incorrect.
Correct the Power Cell input voltage.
The Power Cells input power fuse has blown. Replace the Power Cells input power fuse.
Fault Name
Fuse Blowout
CFA
nn FU
The P side or N side voltage in the DC bus has fallen below the low voltage detection level.
Cause
Possible Solution
Phase loss for the input voltage of Power Cell
(secondary transformer)
Phase loss for the power supply of the
medium-voltage main circuit (primary
Check the wiring of the input terminal for the main circuit of the panel.
transformer)
Fault Name
IGBT Fault
CFA
nn IGBT_FLT
An IGBT fault has been detected.
Cause
Possible Solution
Power Cell fault
Replace the Power Cell.
The motor has been damaged due to
Check the insulation resistance of the motor.
overheating or the motor insulation is
Replace the motor.
damaged.
One of the motor cables has shorted out or
Check the motor cable.
there is a grounding problem.
Remove the short circuit.
Fault Name
Overcurrent
CFA
nn OC
The output current has exceeded 132% of the cells rated current.
Cause
Possible Solution
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Insulation of the motor or the cable is
Replace the motor or cable.
conducting electricity.
The output side cable wiring is wrong.
Correct the wiring.
The acceleration and deceleration times are
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
too short.
The PG is not mounted correctly.
Mount the PG correctly.
PG cable is disconnected.
Reconnect the cable.
PG cable wiring is wrong.
Correct the wiring.
The PG settings are incorrect.
Make correct PG settings.
The motor parameters are not set correctly.
Set the motor parameters correctly.
Troubleshooting
147
5.4 Fault Detection

CFA
nn OH
Cause
Cooling fan fault
The intake filter is soiled.
The heatsink of the Power Cell is soiled.
Fault of the cell control board (CCB),
thermistor or Power Cell
Parameter setting error
CFA
nn OH1
Cause
Cooling fan fault
Fault Name
IGBT Overheating
A thermistor temperature of the value set for L8-02 or higher has been detected.
Possible Solution
If the cooling airflow is inadequate, replace the cooling fan.
If the intake filter is soiled, clean it.
Clean the heatsink of the Power Cell.
Replace the cell control board (CCB), thermistor or Power Cell.
Check the parameter settings.
Fault Name
IGBT Overheating 1
A thermistor temperature has exceeded the protection level.
Possible Solution
Fault Name
Overvoltage 1
The P side or N side voltage in the DC bus has risen above the overvoltage detection level.
Possible Solution
Increase the deceleration time.
Replace the Power Cells input power fuse.
Fault Name
Overvoltage
2
CFA
nn OV2
The P side or N side voltage in the DC bus has risen above the overvoltage detection level.
Cause
Possible Solution
The deceleration time is too short.
Increase the deceleration time.
Fault Name
Thermistor
Disconnect
CFA
nn THBOW
The cable for the thermistor to detect temperature has been disconnected.
Cause
Possible Solution
The thermistor cable is disconnected.
Repair the disconnection.
The thermistor cable wiring is wrong.
Correct the wiring.
Fault of the cell control board or Power Cell
Replace the Power Cell.
Fault Name
Main Circuit Capacitor Neutral Point Potential Error
CFA
nn VCF_OV
The P side or N side voltage in the DC bus has become unbalanced.
Cause
Possible Solution
Replace the electrolytic capacitor.
Deterioration of the buss capacitor circuit or a Check the balance resistance.
Power Cell fault
Check the cable.
CFA
nn OV
Cause
The deceleration time is too short.
The Power Cells input power fuse has blown.
148
5.4 Fault Detection

CPF00, CPF01 <1>
CPF20, CPF21 <1>
Cause
There is a self diagnostic error in control
circuit.
Connector on the operator is damaged.
CPF02
Cause
Control circuit is damaged.
Fault Name
Possible Solution
Cycle control power to the drive.
If the problem continues, replace the control board. For instructions on replacing it,
contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Replace the operator.
Fault Name
A/D Conversion Error
An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.
Possible Solution
If the problem continues, replace the control board. For instructions on replacing it,
Fault Name
EEPROM Memory Data Error

There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
Cause
Possible Solution
There is an error in EEPROM control circuit. If the problem continues, replace the control board. For instructions on replacing it,
The control power supply was switched off while
parameters were being saved to the drive (while Reinitialize the drive (A1-03 = 2220).
the communication option card was in use).
Fault Name
CPF06
Hybrid IC on the main circuit is damaged.

CPF23
Cause
Hardware is damaged.
CPF26 to CPF35
CPF40 to CPF45
Cause
Hardware is damaged.
dEv
Cause
Load is too heavy.
Acceleration and deceleration times are set
too short.
The load is locked up.
Parameters are not set appropriately.
The mechanical holding brake is applied to
the motor.
Hybrid IC Error
Possible Solution
Cycle control power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 178.
If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions
on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
Control Board Connection Error
Connection error between the control board and the Power Cell
Possible Solution
Turn off the power for the main circuit and controls and check the connection between the
control board and the Power Cell.
If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions
on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
Possible Solution
Replace the cell control board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa or your
nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in
F1-10 for longer than the time set to F1-11.
Possible Solution
Check the size of the load.
Reduce the load.
Troubleshooting
CPF22
Cause
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08).

Check the machine.
Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11.
Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
149
5.4 Fault Detection

EF0
Cause
An external fault was received from the PLC
with other than F6-03 = 3 alarm only (the
drive continued to run after external fault).
Problem with the PLC program.
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
EF9
EF10
EF11
EF12
EF13
EF14
EF15
EF16
Cause
An external device has tripped an alarm
function.
Wiring is incorrect.
The sequence contact inputs are set
incorrectly.
150
Fault Name
An external fault condition is present.
Possible Solution
Remove the cause of the external fault.
Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
Check the PLC program and correct problems.
Fault Name
External fault input at sequence input terminal 1
Possible Solution
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the sequence input value.
Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external
fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2B).
Reconnect the signal line.
Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1- = 20 to 2B (External Fault).
Change the terminal settings.
5.4 Fault Detection

Cause
Noise has corrupted data while writing to the
EEPROM.
Hardware problem.
FAn
Cause
Cooling fan fault

FbH
Cause
Wiring for PID feedback is incorrect.
There is a problem with the feedback sensor.
FbL
Cause
Wiring for PID feedback is incorrect.
There is a problem with the feedback sensor.
GF
Cause
damaged.
Large stray capacitance of cable and
terminal.
Hardware problem.
Press the
button.
Correct the parameter setting.

Cycle control power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on
page 178.
Replace the control board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa or your
Fault Name
Fan Fault
Fault of the cooling fan or MC power supply
Possible Solution
Cycle control power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs.
Check if the cooling fan is working.
If the cooling fan has reached the end of its service life or if it has a fault, replace it by
following the instructions in this manual.
Fault Name
PID feedback loss detection is programmed to trigger a fault (b5-12 = 2, 5), and the PID
feedback input is greater than the level set b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37.
Possible Solution
Check the settings of parameters b5-36 and b5-37.
Correct the wiring.
Check the sensor on the controller side.
If damaged, replace the sensor.
Fault Name
PID Feedback Loss
PID feedback loss detection is programmed to trigger a fault (b5-12 = 2) and the PID
feedback input is below the detection level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b514.
Possible Solution
Check the settings of parameters b5-13 and b5-14.
Correct the wiring.
Check the sensor on the controller side.
If damaged, replace the sensor.
Fault Name
Ground Fault
A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
(Setting L8-09 to 1, enables ground fault detection.)
Possible Solution
Replace the motor.
Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on.
Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
Replace the cable.
If the cable length exceeds 100 m, decrease the carrier frequency.
Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.
Replace the control board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa or your
Troubleshooting
Err
Fault Name
EEPROM Write Error
Data cannot be written to the EEPROM.
Possible Solution
151
5.4 Fault Detection

IOV
Cause
Excessive rise of the power supply voltage

LF
Cause
The output cable is disconnected.
The motor winding is damaged.
The output terminal is loose.
The rated current of the motor being used is
less than 5% of the drive rated current.
Fault Name
Input Overvoltage
The main circuit's power supply voltage has exceeded the setting in L2-41 in longer than
the time set to L2-42.
Possible Solution
Check if an appropriate power supply is used.
Take measures to adjust the power supply voltage of the main circuit (for example,
changing the taps of the transformer).
Change the setting (L2-41) to appropriate value.
If detection is faulty, replace the isolation board, which detects the power supply voltage
of the main circuit, or the control board.
Fault Name
Output Phase Loss
Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
Phase Loss Detection is enabled when L8-07 is set to 1 or 2.
Possible Solution
Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
Correct the wiring.
Check the resistance between motor lines.
Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
Retighten the terminals to the tightening torques specified in this manual (refer to page
90).
Check the motor capacities.
Replace the board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Fault Name
CCB-MB
Communication
Error
(Link
Fault)
LIN
nn LINK FAULT
No response has not been returned within 1 ms or longer in the communication cycle.
Cause
Possible Solution
Optical fiber cable fault
Replace the optical fiber cable.
Fault of the cell control board or control board Replace the cell control board (CCB).
(CCB)
Replace the control board.
Fault Name
oFA00
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A
Cause
Possible Solution
The option card installed into port CN5-A is
Connect the option card properly. <2>
incompatible with the drive.
Fault Name
oFA01
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A
Cause
Possible Solution
An output transistor is damaged.
The option board connection to port CN5-A is Turn the control power off and reconnect the option card. Check if the option card is
faulty.
properly plugged into the option port.
oFA02
Cause
Fault Name
Possible Solution
The same or similar option cards are installed

in ports CN5-A, B, and C.
152
5.4 Fault Detection

oFA03 to oFA06
oFA10, oFA11
Fault Name
oFA12 to oFA17
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A
oFA30 to oFA43
Cause

Possible Solution
If the problem continues, replace either the option card.
Fault Name
Option card or hardware is damaged.

oFb00
Cause
The option card installed in port CN5-B is
oFb01
Cause
The option card installed in port CN5-B has
been changed while operating.
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B

Possible Solution
Fault Name
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-B
Possible Solution
Turn the control power off and reconnect the option card. Check if the option card is

oFb02
Cause
Fault Name
Possible Solution

in ports CN5-A and CN5-B.
Fault Name
oFb03 to oFb11
oFb12 to oFb17
Cause
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B

Possible Solution
If the problem continues, replace the option card.
Fault Name

oFC00
Cause
The option card installed in port CN5-C is
oFC01
Cause
The option card installed in port CN5-C has
been changed while operating.
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C

Possible Solution
Fault Name
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C
Possible Solution
Turn the control power off and reconnect the option card. Check if the option card is

oFC02
Cause
Fault Name
Possible Solution

in ports CN5-A, B, and C.
Fault Name
oFC03 to oFC11
oFC12 to oFC17
Cause
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C

Possible Solution
If the problem continues, replace either the option card.
Troubleshooting
153
5.4 Fault Detection

oL1
Cause
Load is too heavy.
Cycle times are too short during acceleration
and deceleration.
A general purpose motor is driven below the
rated speed with too high load.
When using a general-purpose motor, the
operation with less than rated current could
result in the overload at the time of low-speed
operation.
When using the drive dedicated motor, L1-01
(Motor Overload Protection Selection) was 1
(General-purpose motor).
Fault Name
Motor Overload
The electronic motor overload protection tripped.
Possible Solution
Reduce the load.
Check the acceleration/deceleration time and cycle time.
Reduce the load.
Increase the speed.
If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or
use a motor specifically designed to operate in the desired speed range.
Set L1-01 to 2.
Check the motor-rated current.

Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
The base frequency setting is too low.
Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Multiple motors are running off the same the Disable the motor protection function (L1-01 = 0) and install a thermal relay to each
drive.
motor.
The electrical thermal protection
Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics and motor overload
Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01).
characteristics do not match.
Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at the Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
wrong level.
Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01).
Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Speed Search related parameters are set
Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration times (b3-02 and b3-03
incorrectly.
respectively).
After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Estimation Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
Output current fluctuation due to phase loss in
Check whether input phase loss is present and improve the phase loss.
the input power supply.
Fault Name
Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Cause
Possible Solution
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Cycle times are too short during acceleration Check the acceleration/deceleration time and cycle time.
and deceleration.
Overload occurred when operating at low
Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
speeds.
Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation.
Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less
current.
Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
Adjust the current used during Speed Search and the Speed Search deceleration time (b3incorrectly.
03 and b3-02 respectively).
After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Estimation Speed Search (b3-24 = 1).
Output current fluctuation due to input phase
Check whether input phase loss is present and improve the phase loss.
loss
Fault Name
oL3
The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-03).
Cause
Possible Solution
Inappropriate parameter settings
Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
Fault on the machine side (e.g., machine is
Check the status of the machine.
locked up).
Remove the cause of the fault.
The wrong motor rated current is set to E2-01.
154
5.4 Fault Detection
oL4
Cause
Parameter settings are not appropriate for the
load.
locked up).
oL5
Cause
Overtorque triggered mechanical weakening
detection level set to L6-08.
OOV
Cause
Excessive rise of the output voltage
oPr
Cause
External digital operator is not properly
connected to the drive.
oS
Cause
Overshoot is occurring.
Inappropriate parameter settings
PGo
Cause
PG has no power.
PG encoder brake is clamped shut.
PGoH
Cause
Fault Name
The current has exceeded the value set for Torque Detection Level 2 (L6-05) for longer
than the allowable time (L6-06).
Possible Solution
Fault Name
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
Possible Solution
Check for the cause of mechanical weakening.
Fault Name
Output Overvoltage
The output voltage of the drive has exceeded the output overvoltage detection level in L863 for longer than the time set to L8-64.
Possible Solution
Change the motor parameters to appropriate values.
Parameters: E1-, E2-
Change the settings of L8-63 and L8-64 to appropriate values.
Check the cables on the output side for disconnection or incorrect connection, and
correct if necessary.
Fault Name
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The external digital operator has been disconnected from the drive.
Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
Output is interrupted when the digital operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
The Run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 or LOCAL has been selected).
Possible Solution
Check the connection between the digital operator and the drive.
Replace the cable if damaged.
Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the digital operator. Next reconnect the
digital operator and turn the drive input power back on.
Fault Name
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting (Overspeed Detection Level).
Possible Solution
Decrease the setting for C5-01 (ASR Proportional Gain 1) and increase the setting for
C5-02 (ASR Integral Time 1).
Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F108 and F1-09).
Fault Name
No PG pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14.
Possible Solution
Correct the wiring.
Check the power line to the PG encoder.
Ensure the motor brake releases properly.
Fault Name
Troubleshooting

PG cable is not connected properly.
Possible Solution
155
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Too Many Speed Search Restarts

SEr
The number of Speed Search restarts exceeded the number set to b3-19.
Cause
Possible Solution
Reduce the detection compensation gain during Speed Search (b3-10).
Speed Search parameters are set to the wrong Increase the current level when attempting Speed Search (b3-17).
values.
Increase the detection time during Speed Search (b3-18).
Repeat Auto-Tuning.
Fault Name
TME
The temperature of the transformer has increased and has exceeded the protection level set
to L8-87.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cooling fan fault
If the problem occurs even at a low temperature, for example immediately after
Thermistor fault and disconnected signal line
switching on the power, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
Transformer Temperature Fault 1
TME1
The temperature of the transformer has increased and has exceeded the temperature fault
level.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cooling fan fault
If the problem occurs even at a low temperature, for example immediately after
switching on the power, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
Transformer Temperature DI Fault
TME2
A fault was detected from a contact input terminal (transformer overheat) on the control
board.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cooling fan fault
Overheated transformer and disconnected
If the problem occurs even at a low temperature, for example immediately after turning
signal line
the power on, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Fault Name
UL3
Cause
load.
Fault on the machine side.
Example: If there is undertorque, the pulley
belt may be broken.
UL4
Cause
load.
belt may be broken.
156
The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer
Possible Solution
Fault Name
The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer
Possible Solution
Check the load for any problems.
5.4 Fault Detection

UL5
Fault Name
The operation conditions matched the conditions set to L6-08.
Possible Solution
Cause
Undertorque was detected and matched the
conditions for mechanical loss detection set to Check the load side for any problems.
L6-08.
Fault Name
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was operating (during voltage
output):
Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05)
Uv1
2-kV class: Approx. 693 V
Cause
Possible Solution
The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
There is phase loss in the drive input power.
Correct the wiring.
Check if the terminals are loosened.
There is loose wiring in the drive input power
Retighten the terminals to the tightening torques specified in this manual (refer to page
terminals.
90).
Check the voltage.
There is a problem with the voltage from the Correct the voltage to be within the range listed in drive input power specifications.
drive input power.
If there is no problem with the power supply to the main circuit, check for problems with
the main circuit magnetic contactor.
The power has been interrupted.
Correct the drive input power.
Fault Name
Voltage Unbalance
VUB
The sum of the detected output voltages of the three phases exceeded the detection level for
longer than the stipulated time.
Cause
Possible Solution
Replace the motor.
damaged.
Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
Replace the cable.
Correct the wiring.
<1> When a fault occurred at the startup of the drive, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. When a fault occurred after the startup, CPF01 or
CPF21 is displayed.
<2> The number of connectors and options that are able to be installed can differ according to the option. Refer to the table below to connect
it properly.
Table 5.13 Option Card and Available Connector

Available Connector
CN5-A
CN5-B, C
CN5-A, B, C
Available Number of Option Cards

1
2
1
Troubleshooting
Option Card
SI-N3, SI-P3, AI-A3, DI-A3 <3>
PG-B3, PG-X3
DO-A3, AO-A3
<3> When used for monitoring, AI-A3 and DI-A3 can be installed in any of CN5-A, B or C.
157
5.5 Alarm Detection
5.5
Alarm Detection
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Alarms are drive protection functions that do not necessarily cause the drive to stop. Once the cause of an alarm is
removed, the drive will return to the same status as before the alarm occurred.
When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display
flashes. If a sequence output is set for an alarm (H2- = 10), that output terminal will be triggered.
After detecting the minor fault and alarm, refer to Table 5.14 to take proper measures and remove the cause.
Table 5.14 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
BAT
Minor Fault Name

Battery Voltage Low
Low battery voltage has been detected.
Cause
Possible Solutions
The battery voltage has fallen to 3 V or lower. Replace the battery.

Minor Fault Name
bb
Drive Baseblock (Voltage)

Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Cause
Possible Solutions
An external baseblock signal has been input at Check the external circuit (sequence inputs), and review the input
one of the sequence input terminals 1 to 16.
timing of baseblock signals.
Minor Fault Name
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
No
bUS

After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Assign a Run command or frequency reference to the option card.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10

Correct the wiring.
If there are no problems with the wiring and the fault continues to
occur, replace the option card.
The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with
the connector pins on the drive.
Reinstall the option card.
Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.
Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main
circuit lines and ground wiring.
Try to reduce noise on the controller side.
Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment
causing the disturbance.
Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the
controller side or on the drive input power side.
Separate all wiring for comm. devices from drive input power lines.
Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power supply.
Yes
Communications wiring is faulty, there is a

short circuit, or something is not connected
properly.
The communication option card is damaged.
The communication option card is not
properly connected to the drive.
A data error occurred due to noise.
158
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
CALL
Serial Communication Transmission Error

Communication has not yet been established.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Communications circuitry is damaged.

CE
Check for wiring errors.

Correct the wiring.
Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors.
Perform a self-diagnostics check.
If CALL is detected again, replace the control board. For
instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Minor Fault Name
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main
circuit lines, and ground wiring.
Reduce noise on the controller side.
Use surge absorbers for the magnetic contactors or other
A data error occurred due to noise.
components that may be causing the disturbance.
Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the
controller side or on the drive input power side.
Separate all wiring for comm. devices from drive input power lines.
Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power supply.
Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in the
Communication protocol is incompatible.
controller.
Ensure settings are compatible.
The CE detection time (H5-09) is set shorter Check the PLC.
than the time required for a communication
Change the software settings in the PLC.
Set a longer CE detection time (H5-09).
cycle to take place.
Incompatible PLC software settings or there is Check the PLC.
a hardware problem.
Remove the cause of the error on the controller side.
Communications cable is disconnected or
Check the connector to make sure the cable has a signal.
damaged.
Replace the communications cable.
Minor Fault Name
CrST
Cause
A fault reset command was entered while the
Run command was still present.
dEv
Cause
Load is too heavy.
Acceleration and deceleration times are set
too short.
The load is locked up.
Parameter settings are inappropriate.
Brake is holding the PG.
Yes
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Cannot Reset
A fault reset command was entered while the Run command was still present.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check whether a Run command has been input from the external
terminals or communication option card during fault reset.
No
Turn off the Run command.
Minor Fault Name
The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in
F1-10 for longer than the time in F1-11.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Reduce the load.
Troubleshooting
Communications wiring is faulty, there is a

short circuit, or something is not connected
properly.
Programming error on the master side.
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Increase accel and decel times (C1-01 to C1-08).

Check the machine.
Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11.
Ensure the brake releases properly.
Yes
159
5.5 Alarm Detection

dnE
Cause
Drive Enable is set for a sequence input
(H1- = 6A) and that signal has been
switched off.
EF
Minor Fault Name

Drive Disabled
Possible Solutions
Check the operation sequence.
Yes
Minor Fault Name
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error

Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the
problem.
Note: When minor fault EF detected, motor ramps to stop.
Minor Fault Name
Sequence error
EF0
Cause
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
EF9
EF10
EF11
EF12
EF13
EF14
EF15
EF16
160
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes

An external fault condition is present.
Possible Solutions
An external fault was received from the PLC

Remove the cause of the external fault.
with F6-03 = 3 (causing the drive to continue
Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
running when an external fault occurs).
There is a problem with the PLC program.
Check the PLC program and correct problems.
Minor Fault Name
EF1
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes

5.5 Alarm Detection
Cause
The sequence inputs are set incorrectly.

FAn
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the sequence input
value.
Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals
assigned for external fault detection (H1- = 2C to 2F).
Reconnect the signal line.
Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1- = 2C to 2F
(External Fault).
Change the terminal settings.
Minor Fault Name
Fan Fault
Fan or magnetic contactor failed.
Cause
Internal cooling fan has malfunctioned

FbH
Cause
Parameters settings for b5-36 and b5-37 are
incorrect.
PID feedback wiring is faulty.
Feedback sensor has malfunctioned.
Feedback input circuit is damaged.
FbL
Cause
Parameters settings for b5-13 and b5-14 are
incorrect.
PID feedback wiring is faulty.
Feedback sensor has malfunctioned.
Feedback input circuit is damaged.
IOV
Cause
Excessive rise of the power supply voltage
Possible Solutions
Cycle control power to the drive and see if the fault is still present.
Check if the fan is operating or not.
If the cooling fan has passed its expected performance life or is
damaged in some way, follow the instructions in this manual to
replace it.
Minor Fault Name
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes

The PID feedback input is higher than the level set in b5-36 for longer than the time set in
b5-37, and b5-12 is set to 1 or 4.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check parameters b5-36 and b5-37.
Correct the wiring.
Check the sensor and replace it if damaged.
Replace the board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa
or your nearest sales representative.
Minor Fault Name
Yes
PID Feedback Loss

The PID feedback input was lower than the level set in b5-13 (PID Feedback Loss
Detection Level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID Feedback Loss Detection
Time).
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check parameters b5-13 and b5-14.
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Check the sensor and replace it if damaged.
Replace the board. For instructions on replacing it, contact Yaskawa
or your nearest sales representative.
Minor Fault Name
Input Overvoltage
The main circuit's power supply voltage has exceeded the setting in L2-41 in longer than
the time set to L2-42.
Minor Fault
Possible Solution
Output
H2-=10
Check if an appropriate power supply is used.
Take measures to adjust the power supply voltage of the main
circuit (for example, changing the taps of the transformer).
Yes
Change the setting (L2-41) to appropriate value.
If detection is faulty, replace the isolation board, which detects the
power supply voltage of the main circuit, or the control board.
Troubleshooting
An external device has tripped an alarm

function.
Possible Solutions
161
5.5 Alarm Detection

oH
Cause
Cooling fan fault
oH2
Cause
An external device triggered an overheat
warning in the drive.
oL1
Cause
Minor Fault Name

IGBT Overheating
A thermistor temperature of the value set for L8-02 or higher has been detected.
Minor Fault
Possible Solution
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Minor Fault Name
Drive Overheat Warning
A Drive Overheat Warning was input to a sequence input terminal, 1 through 16 (H1= B).
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Search for the device that tripped the overheat warning.
Yes
Solving the problem will clear the warning.
Minor Fault Name
Motor Overload
The electronic motor overload protection tripped.
Possible Solutions
Reduce the load.

Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C108).
Reduce the load.
Increase the speed.
A general purpose motor is driven below the
If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the
rated speed with too high load.
motor capacity or use a motor specifically designed to operate in the
desired speed range.
Adjust the user-set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters
E1-08 and E1-10 may need to be reduced. Be careful not to lower E1The output voltage is too high.
08 and E1-10 too much because this reduces load tolerance at low
speeds.
Check the motor-rated current.
The wrong motor rated current is set to E2-01.
Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
The base frequency is set incorrectly.
Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Check the motor characteristics.
The electrical thermal protection
characteristics and motor overload
Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01).
characteristics do not match.
Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at the Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
wrong level.
Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01).
Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration
times (b3-02 and b3-03 respectively).
incorrectly.
After Auto-Tuning, enable Speed Estimation Speed Search (b3-24 =
1).
Output current fluctuation due to power
Check the power supply for phase loss.
supply loss
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Load is too heavy.

Cycle times are too short during acceleration
and deceleration.
162
Yes
5.5 Alarm Detection
oL2
Minor Fault Name

Drive Overload
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Cause
Load is too heavy.
Acceleration or deceleration times are too
short.
The output voltage is too high.
Drive capacity is too small.
Overload occurred when operating at low
speeds.
Excessive torque compensation.

incorrectly.
Output current fluctuation due to input phase
loss
oL3
Cause
Inappropriate parameter settings.
locked up).
oL4
Cause
locked up).
oL5
Cause
Overtorque triggered mechanical weakening
detection level set to L6-08.
Possible Solutions
Reduce the load.
Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C101 through C1-08).
Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will
mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this
reduces load tolerance at low speeds.
Replace the drive with a larger model.
Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed
loss but less current.
Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
Adjust the current used during Speed Search and the Speed Search
deceleration time (b3-03 and b3-02 respectively).
After Auto-Tuning the drive, enable the Speed Estimation Speed
Search (b3-24 = 1).
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Check the power supply for phase loss.

Minor Fault Name
Overtorque 1
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-02
for longer than the time set in L6-03.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
Yes
Minor Fault Name
Overtorque 2
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-05
for longer than the time set in L6-06.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Minor Fault Name
Overtorque occurred, matching the conditions specified in L6-08.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check for the cause of mechanical weakening.
Yes
Troubleshooting
163
5.5 Alarm Detection

OOV
Cause
Excessive rise of the output voltage

oS
Minor Fault Name

Output Overvoltage
The output voltage of the drive has exceeded the output overvoltage detection level in L863 for longer than the time set to L8-64.
Minor Fault
Possible Solution
Output
H2-=10
Change the motor parameters to appropriate values.
Parameters: E1-, E2-
Change the settings of L8-63 and L8-64 to appropriate values.
Yes
Check the cables on the output side for disconnection or incorrect
connection, and correct if necessary.
Minor Fault Name
The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting.
Cause
Overshoot is occurring.
PASS
Possible Solutions
Set C5-01 (ASR Proportional Gain 1) and C5-02 (ASR Integral
Time 1) to bigger.
Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the
overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-09).
Minor Fault Name
PGo
Cause
PG encoder does not have enough power.
Brake is holding the PG.
PGoH
Possible Solutions
No measures (not an alarm.)
This verifies that the test was successful.
Minor Fault Name
rUn
Cause
No

PG cable disconnection was detected.
Possible Solutions
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
Minor Fault Name

Motor Switch during Run
A command to switch motors was entered during run.
Possible Solutions
A motor switch command was entered during Change the operation pattern so that the motor switch command is
run.
entered while the drive is stopped.
164
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10

Detected when no PG pulses are received for a time longer than setting in F1-14.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Make sure the correct power supply is properly connected to the PG
encoder.
Ensure the brake releases properly
Minor Fault Name
Cause
Yes
MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
Cause
MEMOBUS/Modbus test has finished
normally.
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Yes
5.5 Alarm Detection

Cause
A digital input set to 67H (MEMOBUS/
Modbus test) was closed while the drive was
running.
TMA1
Cause
Cooling fan fault
UL3
Cause
belt may be broken.
UL4
Cause
belt may be broken.
UL5
Stop the drive and run the test again.
Yes
Minor Fault Name

The temperature of the transformer has increased and has exceeded the protection level set
to L8-87.
Minor Fault
Possible Solution
Output
H2-=10
Yes
If the problem occurs even at a low temperature, for example
immediately after switching on the power, contact Yaskawa or your
Minor Fault Name
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) less than L6-02 for
longer than L6-03 time.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Yes

Minor Fault Name
Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM) less than L6-05 for
longer than L6-06 time.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Yes

Minor Fault Name
The operation conditions matched the conditions set to L6-08.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Undertorque was detected and matched the

conditions for mechanical loss detection set to Check the load side for any problems.
L6-08.
Minor Fault
Output
H2-=10
Troubleshooting
SE
Minor Fault Name

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
A digital input set to 67H (MEMOBUS/Modbus test) was closed while the drive was
running.
Minor Fault
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Yes
165
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true while the drive was stopped (a Run command was
not entered):
Uv
DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened.
Low voltage in the control drive input power.
Minor Fault
Cause
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
Phase loss in the drive input power.
Correct the wiring.
Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened.
Loose wiring in the drive input power
Retighten the terminals to the tightening torques specified in this
terminals.
Yes
manual (refer to page 90).
There is a problem with the drive input power Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the
voltage.
limits listed in the specifications.
The power has been interrupted.
Correct the drive input power.
Minor Fault Name
Voltage Unbalance
VUB
The sum of the detected output voltages of the three phases exceeded the detection level for
longer than the stipulated time.
Minor Fault
Cause
Possible Solutions
Output
H2-=10
Replace the motor.
damaged.
Yes
Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground
terminal .
Replace the cable.
Correct the wiring.
166
5.6 Operator Programming Error
5.6
Operator Programming Error
oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to
an inappropriate value. The drive will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly.
An oPE, however, does not trigger a sequence terminal set for fault or alarm output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the
cause and refer to Table 5.15 for the appropriate action. When an oPE appears on the digital operator display, press the
ENTER button to view U1-18 and see the parameter that is causing the oPE error (U1-18).
Table 5.15 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
oPE01
Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Possible Solutions
Cause
The drive model selection (o2-04) and the
Correct the value set to o2-04.
actual capacity of the drive are not the same.
Error Name
Parameter Range Setting Error

oPE02
Parameters were set outside the possible setting range.
Cause
Possible Solutions
Parameters were set outside the possible
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
setting range.
Set the parameters to the proper values.
The user is trying to set the motor rated current in E2-01 to a value lower than the no-load
current set in E2-03.
Motor rated current and the motor no-load
Make sure that value set in E2-01 is higher than E2-03.
current setting in the drive are incorrect.
If E2-01 must be set to a value lower than the preset setting of E2-03, first lower the value
assigned to E2-03, then change the setting in E2-01 as needed.
Note: When multiple errors occur at the same time, other errors are given precedence over oPE02.
Error Name
Cause
The same function is assigned to more than
one sequence input.
Excludes Not used and External Fault.
The Up command was set but the Down
command was not, or vice versa (settings 10
vs. 11).
The Up 2 command was set but the Down 2
command was not, or vice versa (settings 75
vs. 76).
Run/Stop command for a 2-wire sequence
was set (H1- = 42), but Forward/
Reverse command (H1- = 43) was not.
Two of the following functions are set at the
same time:
Up/Down Command (10 vs. 11)
Up 2/Down 2 Command (75 vs. 76)
Hold Accel/Decel Stop (A)
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold
(1E)
Offset Frequency 1, 2, 3 Calculations (44,
45, 46)
The Up/Down command (10, 11) is enabled
at the same time as PID control (b5-01).
Sequence Input Selection Error

An incorrect function assignment is set for sequence inputs H1-01 to H1-16.
Possible Solutions
Ensure all sequence inputs are assigned to different functions.
Re-enter the sequence settings to ensure there is no duplication.
Correctly set functions that need to be enabled in combination with other functions.
Check if contradictory settings have been assigned to the multi-function input terminals at
the same time.
Correct the sequence input settings.
Troubleshooting
oPE03
Disable control PID (b5-01 = 0) or disable the Up/Down command.
167

Settings for N.C. and N.O. input for the
following functions were selected at the same
time:
External Search Command 1 and External
Search Command 2 (61 vs. 62)
Fast Stop N.O. and Fast Stop N.C. (15 vs.
17)
Motor Switch Command and Accel/Decel
Time 2 (16 vs. 1A)
FWD Run Command (or REV) and FWD/
REV Run Command (2-wire) (40, 41 vs.
42, 43)
External DB Command and Drive Enable
(60 vs. 6A)
Motor Switch Command and Up 2/Down 2
Command (16 vs. 75, 76)
One of the following settings was entered
while H1- = 2 (External Reference 1/2):
b1-15 or b1-16 set to 3 but no option card
is connected
b1-15 = 1 (Analog Input) and H3-02
(Analog Input Function Selection) is not set
to 0 (Analog Frequency Reference).
H2- = 38 (Drive Enabled) but H1- is
not set to 6A (Drive Enable).
A signed value (H3-01) is set for the analog
input while allocating the UP2/DOWN2
commands (75 and 76).
oPE05
Cause
Frequency reference is assigned to an option
card (b1-01 = 3) but an input option card is
not connected to the drive.
The Run command is assigned to an option
card (b1-02 = 3) but an input option card is
not connected to the drive.
Although the digital card input is set for BCD
special for a 5 digit input (F3-01 = 6), the
data length is set for 8 bit or 12 bit (F3-03 =
0, 1).
The following values have been set while an
AI-A3 option card is installed:
The source of frequency reference setting
is assigned to an option card (b1-01 = 3).
The action for the analog card is set for
separate terminal input (F2-01 = 0).
The content below is set at the same time but
AI-A3 option is not connected.
b1-16 (Run Command Selection 2) = 3
(Option card)
H1- = 2 (External reference 1/2
selection)
168
Check for contradictory settings assigned to the multi-function input terminals at the same
time.
Check for contradictory settings assigned to the multi-function input terminals at the same
time.
Cancel either setting.

Error Name
Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error
The setting for executing a Run command or frequency reference from communication
option card input is not correct.
Possible Solutions
Reconnect the input option card to the drive.
Set the input data for 16 bit (F3-03 = 2).
Make sure parameters are set properly.
Make sure parameters are set properly.

oPE06
Error Name
Control Method Selection Error
Correct the setting for the control method.
Possible Solutions
Cause
A control mode has been selected that
Connect a PG option card.
requires a PG option card to be installed (A1Correct the value set to A1-02.
02 = 3), but no PG option card is installed.
oPE07
Cause
At least two analog input terminals are set to
the same function (i.e., at least two of these
parameters has the same setting: H3-02 and
H3-10).
The following simultaneous contradictory
settings:
H3-02 and H3-10 = C (PID Target Value)
while b5-18 = 1 (enables b5-19 as the target
PID value)
oPE08
Error Name
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error

A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-02, H3-10 and PID
functions conflict.
Possible Solutions
Change the settings to H3-02 and H3-10 so that functions no longer conflict.
Note: Both 0 (frequency reference bias) and F (not used) or 1F (Through mode) can be set
to H3-02 and H3-10 at the same time.
Disable one of the PID selections.
Error Name
Parameter Selection Error
A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method selected.
Possible Solutions
Cause
Attempted to use a function that is not valid
Check the motor control method and the functions available.
for the selected control mode.
In Open Loop Vector Control, n2-02 is
Correct parameter settings so that n2-02 is less than n2-03.
greater than n2-03
In Open Loop Vector Control, C4-02 is
Correct parameter settings so that C4-02 is less than C4-06.
greater than C4-06
Note: Use U1-18 to find which parameters are set outside the specified setting range.
Other errors are given precedence over oPE08 when multiple errors occur at the same time.
Error Name
Cause
The following simultaneous contradictory
settings have occurred:
b5-15 not 0.0 (PID Sleep Function Start
Level)
The stopping method is set to either DC
Injection Braking or coast to stop with a
timer (b1-03 = 2 or 3).
When b5-01 = 1 or 2 (PID output 1/2), d2-02
(Frequency Reference Lower Limit) 0 was
specified.
When b5-01 = 1 or 2 (PID output 1/2), b5-11
(PID Output Reverse Selection) = 1 (Rotation
direction reverses with negative PID output)
was specified.
PID control is set to b5-01 = 3 or 4, but the
lower limit for the frequency reference (d201) is not 0.
PID Control Selection Fault

PID control function selection is incorrect. Requires that PID control is enabled (b5-01 = 1
to 4).
Possible Solutions
Set b5-15 to another value besides 0.

Set the stopping method to coast to stop or ramp to stop (b1-03 = 0 or 1).
Correct the parameter settings.

Troubleshooting
oPE09
169

oPE10
Cause
V/f Pattern Setting Error
oPE15
Error Name
V/f Data Setting Error
The following setting errors have occurred where:
E1-09 E1-07 < E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
E3-09 E3-07 < E3-06 E3-11 E3-04
Possible Solutions
Correct the settings for E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, E1-09, and E1-11 (for motor 2, correct E3-04,
E3-06, E3-07, E3-09, and E3-11).
Error Name
Torque Control Setting Error
Parameters settings that are not allowed in combination with Torque Control have been set.
Possible Solutions
Cause
When A1-02 = 3 (Closed loop vector
control), the following setting is specified.
The torque control selection is specified at
the same time. d5-01=1 and H1-=71
DROOP control and feed forward control
are enabled when torque control is selected:
d5-01 = 1 or H1- = 71, and also b7-01
0 or n5-01 = 1.
Correct the settings of b7-01, d5-01, H1-, L3-04 and n5-01.
KEB command 2 (N.O. input, N.C. input)
is enabled when torque control is selected:
d5-01 = 1 or H1- =71 and also H1-
= 7A or H1- = 7b.
The optimal deceleration and
overexcitation deceleration 2 are enabled
when torque control is selected.(d5-01=1 or
H1-=71) and (L3-04=2 or L3-04=5)
Error Name
Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error
oPE18
Parameters that control Online Tuning are not set correctly.
Cause
Possible Solutions
One of the following settings has occurred
while Online Tuning is enabled (n6-01 = 2) in
Open Loop Vector control (A1-02 = 2).
E2-02 has been set below 30% of the
Make sure E2-02, E2-03, and E2-06 are set the correct values.
original default value
E2-06 has been set below 50% of the
original default value
E2-03 = 0
170
5.7 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
5.7
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

The Auto-Tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital
operator and the motor coasts to a stop. Auto-Tuning faults do not trigger a sequence terminal set for fault or alarm
output.
An End error (where is a numeric character) indicates that although Auto-Tuning has been completed, there is some
discrepancy in the calculations the drive made. If there is found to be no problem on checking the cause, use the tuning
value as it stands. If there is judged to be a problem, implement countermeasures and then perform Auto-Tuning again, or
set (input) the motor parameters manually.
Table 5.16 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
End1
Cause
The torque reference exceeded 20% during
Auto-Tuning.
The results from Auto-Tuning the no-load
current exceeded 80%.
End2
Cause
Motor data or data entered during AutoTuning was incorrect.
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the
parameter setting range, assigning the ironcore saturation coefficient (E2-07, E2-08) a
temporary value.
End3
Cause
The correct current rating printed on the
nameplate was not entered into T1-04.
Error Name
Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning, and displayed after
Auto-Tuning is complete)
Possible Solution
Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor nameplate and
enter that data to T1-03 through T1-05.
Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning.
If possible, disconnect the motor from the load and perform Auto-Tuning. If the load
cannot be uncoupled, simply use the Auto-Tuning results as they are.
Error Name
Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Error (detected only during Rotational AutoTuning and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
Possible Solution
Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the
motor nameplate.
Enter the correct information and restart Auto-Tuning.
Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Error Name
Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
Possible Solution
Check the setting of parameter T1-04.
Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Error Name
End5
Cause
The resistance value that was calculated is
outside the allowable range.
Troubleshooting
End4
Adjusted Slip Calculation Error
Cause
Possible Solution
In Stationary Auto-Tuning, the slip value
resulted in 0.2 Hz or less.
The slip that was calculated is outside the
Check the value input for T1-.
allowable range.
Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning instead.
The value after the compensation in E2-08
(Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2)
exceeds the upper and lower limits.
The measured value of secondary resistance is
negative.
Error Name
Resistance Tuning Error
Possible Solution
Double check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
171

Error Name
End7
No-Load Current Alarm
Cause
Possible Solution
The entered no-load current value was outside
the allowable range.
Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of the
Double check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
motor rated current.
Error Name
Er-01
Cause
Motor Data Error

Possible Solution
Check that the motor data entered to T1 parameters matches motor nameplate input before
Auto-Tuning.
Enter the correct information and start Auto-Tuning over again.
Check the drive and motor capacities.
Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03.
Motor output power and motor-rated current

settings (T1-02 and T1-04) do not match.
Motor rated current and detected no-load
current are not consistent with another.
Base frequency and motor rated speed (T1-05
Set T1-05 and T1-07 to the correct value.
and T1-07) do not match.
Error Name
Er-02
Cause
Possible Solution
Auto-Tuning.
Enter the correct information and start Auto-Tuning over again.
Check and modify the wiring.
Load is too heavy.
Er-03
Cause
Auto-Tuning canceled by pressing STOP
button.
Er-04
Er-05
Er-08
Cause
The tuning process took too long.
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the
parameter setting range.
Er-09
Cause
The motor did not accelerate for the specified
acceleration time.
Torque limit when motoring is too low (L7-01
and L7-02).
172
Minor Fault
Check the circumference of the machine.

Check the load.
Error Name
STOP Button Input
Possible Solution
Auto-Tuning did not complete properly and will have to be performed again.
Error Name
Line-to-Line Resistance Error
No-Load Current Error
Rated Slip Error
Possible Solution
Auto-Tuning.
Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information.
Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Error Name
Acceleration Error (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning)
Possible Solution
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible.
Increase the setting.

Er-10
Cause
The connection of drive and PG encorder
(pulses A, B) or the connection of drive and
motor (phases U, V, W) is wrong.
Error Name
Motor Direction Error (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning)
Possible Solution
Check and correct wiring to the PG encoder.
Check the wiring of motor.
Check the motor speed monitor U1-05 while turning the motor manually in forward
direction.
If the sign displayed is negative, change the setting of parameter F1-05.
The load pulled the motor in the opposite
The motor is turning around pulled by the machine.
direction of the speed reference and the torque Uncouple the motor from the machine.
exceeded 100% in Closed Loop Vector
There is a problem in PGs wiring, PGs rotation direction, and the setting of F1-05.
Control.
Check PGs wiring and the setting of F1-05.
Error Name
Motor and PG direction are opposite.
Er-11
Cause
Torque reference is too high during the
acceleration (only for the Open Loop Vector
Control).
Motor Speed Fault (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning)

Possible Solution
Er-12
Cause
One of the motor phases is missing: (U, V, W).
Current exceeded the current rating of the
motor.
Current Detection Error
The current is too low.
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).

Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible.
Error Name
Possible Solution
Check all wiring and correct any mistakes.
Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines.
If a magnetic contactor is used between motors, make sure it is closed.
representative.
Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning.
Current detection signal error.
representative.
Troubleshooting
Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor

connected to the drive.
173
5.8 LED Indicators on the Controller and CCB (Cell Control Board)
5.8
LED Indicators on the Controller and CCB (Cell Control Board)
The following describes the LED indicators on the controller in the control panel and on the CCB in the Power Cell
panel. These indicators display operation statuses and faults.
LED Indicators on the Controller

The controller has two types of LED indicators: An LED indicator that displays the controller status, and an LED
indicator that displays the Power Cell status detected by the controller.
Figure 5.1
<Position of the controller>
<Status with the controller drawn out>

Controller

%#76+10

%#76+10
%$
%$
%$
Controller
(Draw-out
construction)
4#0- 4#0- 4#0- 4#0- 4#0-
$#6
'44
470
294
%$
2*A#
2*A$
2*A%
$;25
Transformer
Drive panel
Figure 5.1 LED on Controller
Power Cell Status LEDs

PH_A RANK1 to 5 (Red): Lit when a U-phase rank 1 to 5 Power Cell fault occurs.
PH_B RANK1 to 5 (Red): Lit when a V-phase rank 1 to 5 Power Cell fault occurs.
PH_C RANK1 to 5 (Red): Lit when a W-phase rank 1 to 5 Power Cell fault occurs.
BYPS RANK1 to 5 (Red): Lit when a fault occurs in a rank 1 to 5 Power Cell for bypass.
Controller Status LEDs
BAT (Red): Lit when the battery voltage has dropped.
ERR (Red): Lit when a fault occurs in the controller.
RUN (Green): Lit when the controller is operating.
PWR (Green): Lit when the control power is on.
174
5.8 LED Indicators on the Controller and CCB (Cell Control Board)
LED Indications on the Cell Control Board

The LEDs on the cell control board mounted in a Power Cell indicate the power supply status of the cell control board
and the operation status/fault status of the Power Cell.
Figure 5.2
<Position of the cell control board>
<When the cell control boards cover is removed>
Power Cell
PWR
FLT
LINK
CHARGE1
CHARGE2
Cell control board

Figure 5.2 LEDs on the Cell Control Board
PWR (Green):
Lit when the control power is on.
FLT (Red):
Lit when a Power Cell fault occurs.
LINK (Green):
Lit when transmissions to/from the controller are normal.
CHARGE1 (Red): Lit when the DC bus bar voltage Vpc is 50 V or higher.
CHARGE2 (Red): Lit when the DC bus bar voltage Vcn is 50 V or higher.
Never touch the Power Cell while any of these LED indicators are lit.
The LED indications for the Power Cell ready status, normal operation status, and fault status are shown in the following
table.
Table 5.17 LED Indications on the Cell Control Board
LED
PWR (Green)
FLT (Red)
LINK (Green)
CHARGE1 (Red)
CHARGE2 (Red)
Power Cell Ready Status <1>
Normal Operation <1>
Fault <1>
Troubleshooting
<1> signifies off, signifies on, and signifies an unstable state with the LED going on and off.
175
5.9 Copy Function Related Displays
5.9
Copy Function Related Displays
Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting

The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function.
When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the digital operator indicates the task being performed. When an
error occurs, a code appears on the digital operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do
not trigger a sequence terminal set for fault or alarm output. To clear an error, simply press any key on the LCD operator.
Refer to Table 5.18 to take proper measures and remove the cause.
Note: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the drive should be fully stopped.
2. The drive will not accept a Run command while the Copy function is being executed.
3. Parameters can only be saved to an drive when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match.
Table 5.18 Copy Function Task and Error Displays

Error Name
CoPy
Cause
Parameters are being written to the drive.
Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)

Possible Solution
Not an error.
Error Name
CPEr
Cause
Control mode of the parameters to be loaded
onto the drive and the control mode already
set to the drive dont match.
CPyE
Cause
Failed writing parameters.
CSEr
Cause
Hardware fault
dFPS
Cause
The drive from which the parameter were
copied and the drive you are attempting to
write to are not the same model.
The drive the parameters were copied from
is a different model drive.
The drive you are attempting to write to is a
different model.
End
Cause
Finished reading, writing, or verifying
parameters.
iFEr
Cause
A communication error occurred between the
drive and the digital operator or the USB
Copy Unit.
A non-compatible cable is being used to
connect the USB Copy Unit and the drive.
Control Mode Mismatch
176
Possible Solution
Check the control mode for the parameters that are to be loaded onto the drive and the
control mode set to the drive those parameters will be written to.
Set the same control mode using parameter A1-02 and try again.
Error Name
Error Writing Data
Possible Solution
Try writing parameters again.
Error Name
Copy Unit Error
Possible Solution
Replace the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit.
Error Name
Drive Model Mismatch
Possible Solution
Check the model number of the drive that the parameters were copied from and the model
of the drive you are attempting to write those parameters to.
Make sure the drive from which the parameter are copied and the drive to be written to
have the same model numbers and software versions.
Error Name
Task Complete
Possible Solution
Not an error.
Error Name
Communication Error
Possible Solution
Check the cable connection.
Use the cable originally packaged with the USB Copy Unit.
5.9 Copy Function Related Displays

ndAT
Cause
and the drive you are attempting to write to
have different electrical specifications, a
different capacity, is set to a different control
mode, or is a different model number.
The drive or USB Copy Unit being used to
write the parameters is blank and does not
have any parameters saved on it.
rdEr
Cause
Failed while attempting to read parameter
settings from the drive.
rEAd
Cause
Displayed while the parameter settings are
being read onto the USB Copy Unit.
vAEr
Cause
and the drive you are performing the Verify
mode on have different electrical
specifications or are a different capacity.
Make sure model numbers and specifications are the same for both drives.
Make sure all connections are correct, and copy the parameter settings onto the USB
Copy Unit or the digital operator.
Error Name
Error Reading Data
Possible Solution
Press and hold the READ key on the USB Copy Unit for at least one second to have the
unit read parameters from the drive.
Error Name
Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)
Possible Solution
Not an error.
Error Name
Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
Possible Solution
Make sure electrical specifications and capacities are the same for both drives.
Error Name
Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same
Possible Solution
To have the same parameter settings for both devices, either copy the parameter settings
on the USB Copy Unit or the digital operator and save them in the drive. Or, copy the
parameter settings on the drive and save them in the USB Copy Unit or the digital operator.
Error Name
Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing)
Possible Solution
Not an error.
Troubleshooting
vFyE
Cause
Indicates that parameter settings that have
been Read and loaded onto the Copy Unit or
digital operator are different.
vrFy
Cause
The Verify mode has confirmed that
parameters settings on the drive and
parameters read to the copy device are
identical.
Error Name
Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
Possible Solution
177
5.10 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the drive stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever conditions triggered the fault,
then restart the drive.
Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (U, V, W) or between
the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death
and will cause damage to equipment.
1. Turn the control power on.

2. Use monitor parameters U2- to display data on the operating status of the drive just before the fault
occurred.
3. Remove the cause of the fault and reset.

4. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 146 for information on how to view fault
data.
Note: 1. To find out what faults were triggered, check the fault history in U2-02 (Previous Fault). Information on drive status when the fault
occurred such as the frequency, current, and voltage can be found in U2-03 through U2-31.
Refer to Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault on page 178 for information on how to view fault data.
2. When the fault continues to be displayed after cycling power, remove the cause of the fault and reset.
If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs

1. Turn the main circuit power supply off.
2. Look at the digital operator for information on the fault that occurred.
3. Remove the cause of the fault and reset.
Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 146.
4. Reset the fault.
Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 179.
Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault

A checking method is shown here using an example in which the drive detects oL2 (Drive Overheat).
Step
1 Turn on the drive input power. The first screen displays.
2 Press
3 Press
4 Press
178
until the monitor screen is displayed.
to display the parameter setting screen.
and
until U2-01 (Previous Fault) is displayed.
Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - DRV Rdy

Monitor Menu
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
-MONITR- DRV Rdy

Monitor
U1 -01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.0A
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
-MONITR- DRV Rdy
Current Fault
U2 -01=
U2-02= oL2
LSEQ
U2-03= 0.00Hz LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV

Step
5 Press
Display/Result
- MONITR - DRV Rdy
Last Fault
U2-02= oL2
to view faults in the past (oL2 in this example).
U2-03= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U2-04= 0.00Hz LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MONITR - DRV Rdy

Frequency Ref
U2-03= 0.00Hz
Continue to press
to monitor the content of U2-03 to U2-28. Parameters U2-03
6 through U2-31 help determine the cause of a fault. Parameters to be monitored differ
depending on the control mode.
U2-04= 0.00Hz LSEQ

U2-05= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MONITR - DRV Rdy

Input Voltage
U2-31= 00000001
U2-01= ----LSEQ
U2-02= oL2
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
Fault Reset Methods

When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The table below lists the
different ways to restart the drive.
No.
After the Fault Occurs
Procedure
ALARM
- MODE -
Method 1
After remove the cause of

the fault, restart the drive,
and reset the fault.
Press the RESET key on the digital operator

while it is displaying the code that indicates the
specific fault.
oC
Overcurrent
FWD RESET
F1
F2
ESC
LO
RE
RESET
ENTER
RUN
Method 2
Method 3
Close then open the fault signal digital input

via terminal 7.
(14 (fault reset) has to be assigned to sequence
Resetting via Fault Reset
input H1-.)
Digital Input 7
Note: The terminal 7 is set for
Fault Reset as default
(H1-04 = 14).
Turn off the drive main power supply and control power supply.
When the LEDs on the digital operator have gone out, turn the power
supplies back on: the control power supply and then the drive main power
supply.
DRV
STOP
Drive
Fault reset
7
8
Troubleshooting
Note: If the Run command is present, the drive will disregard any attempts to reset the fault. The Run command must first be removed
before a fault situation can be cleared.
179
5.11 Troubleshooting without Fault Display

When the drive or motor goes wrong even though the fault or error code is not displayed in the digital operator, refer to
this section to take appropriate measures.
When the symptoms below occurred which may result from the control performance, refer to Motor Performance FineTuning on page 138 in this manual, or to the FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide.
Motor hunting and oscillation

Poor motor torque
Poor motor torque and speed response
Motor noise
List of Key Phenomena

Content of Phenomenon
Cannot Change Parameter Settings
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button
or after Entering External Run Command
Motor Does Not Rotate

Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run
Command
Motor Rotates in One Direction Only
Motor is Too Hot

Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning
Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads/Acceleration Time is Too Long
Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency Reference Command
Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation
Load Falls When Brake is Applied (Hoist-Type Applications)
Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On
Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery
Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates
Oscillation or Hunting
PID Output Fault
Insufficient Starting Torque
Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off (Motor Rotates During DC Injection Braking)
Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference
Motor Does Not Restart after Power Loss
Reference
Page
180
181
182
182
182
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
Cannot Change Parameter Settings

Cause
Possible Solutions
The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Run command Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode.
is present).
Note: Most parameters cannot be edited during run.
The Access Level is set to restrict access to parameter
Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2).
settings.
See what mode the digital operator is currently set for.
The digital operator is not in the Parameter Setup
Parameters cannot be edited when in the Setup Mode (STUP). Switch modes
Mode (the screen will display PAr).
so that PAr appears on the screen. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes
on page 111.
A sequence input terminal is set to allow parameter
When the terminal is open, parameters cannot be edited.
editing (H1-01 through H1-13 = 1B).
Turn on the sequence input terminal set to 1B and then set the parameter.
If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, then
drive settings cannot be changed.
Reset the password.
Note: If you cannot remember the password:
The wrong password was entered.
Scroll to A1-04. Press the
button and press
at the same time.
Parameter A1-05 will appear.

Set a new password to parameter A1-05.
180
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering
External Run Command
Motor Does Not Rotate
Possible Solutions
Check if the DRV light on the digital operator is lit.
The drive is not in the Drive Mode.
Enter the Drive Mode to begin operating the motor (refer to 111).
To change the run authority to the digital operator, press the LO/RE function
selection key while the drive is stopping. Then disable the Run commands from the
The LO/RE function selection key was pressed as a
control circuit terminal.
command was entered from the control circuit
Do one of the following procedures.
terminal.
Press the LO/RE function selection key again.
Restart the control power.
Note: If o2-01 is set to 0, then the LO/RE button will be disabled.
When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive is switched back to the Programming
Mode. The Run command will not be accepted unless the drive is in the Drive
Auto-Tuning has just completed.
Mode.
Use the digital operator to enter the Drive Mode (refer to 111).
A Fast Stop was executed and has not yet been reset. Reset the Fast Stop command.
Check parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection 1).
Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct Run command source.
Settings are incorrect for the source that provides the 0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
Run command.
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
Check the wiring for the control terminal.
There is faulty wiring in the control circuit terminals. Correct wiring mistakes.
Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10).
Check parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection 1).
Set b1-01 to the correct source of the frequency reference.
0: Digital operator Keypad
The drive has been set to accept the frequency
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
reference from the incorrect source.
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
Check the frequency reference monitor (U1-01).
Frequency reference is too low.
Increase the frequency by changing the maximum output frequency (E1-09).
Check the analog input terminal settings.
If 1 (frequency reference gain) has been set for H3-02 (function selection for analog
input terminal L1) and no voltage (current) has been input, the frequency reference
The analog input setting is not appropriate.
will be zero.
Check if H3-02 has been set to the proper values.
Check if the analog input value has been set properly (U1-13).
When the STOP key is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop.
The STOP key was pressed.
Switch off the Run command and then re-enter a new Run command.
Note: The STOP key can be disabled when o2-02 is set to 0.
Motor starting torque is too low.
Adjust the parameters that affect controllability (refer to 138).
Frequency reference value is too low or the drive does
Enter a value that is above the minimum output frequency determined by E1-09.
not accept the value entered.
Troubleshooting
Cause
181

Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command
Cause
Possible Solutions
Check the motor wiring.
Switch two motor cables (U, V, and W) to reverse motor direction.
Phase wiring between the drive and motor is incorrect.
Connect drive output terminals U, V, and W in the right order to match motor
terminals U, V, and W.
The connection is incorrect between the drives
Check to see the wiring of control circuit.
control circuit terminals (forward/reverse) and
Correct the wiring.
forward/reverse signals of control panel.
Connect the drives output terminals (U, V, and W) and motor terminals (U, V,
and W) properly.
When the wiring is correct, exchange two of cables U, V, and W connected to the
motor.
The forward direction for the motor is setup
incorrectly.
The motor is running at almost 0 Hz and the Speed

Search estimated the speed to be in the opposite
direction.
1 Typically, forward is designated as being

counterclockwise when looking from the motor shaft.
2 Motor Shaft
Disable bi-directional search (b3-14 = 0) so that Speed Search is performed

only in the specified direction.
Note: Check the motor specifications for the forward and reverse directions. The motor specifications will vary depending on the
manufacturer of the motor.
Motor Rotates in One Direction Only

Cause
The drive prohibits reverse rotation.
Possible Solutions
Check parameter b1-04.
Set the drive to allow the motor to rotate in reverse (b1-04 = 0).
Motor is Too Hot

Cause
Possible Solutions
If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated
torque value for an extended period of time.
Note: Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload
rating in addition to the possible solutions provided below:
The load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor
rated current (E2-01).
Increase motor capacity.
Check the ambient temperature.
The air around the motor is too hot.
Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range.
Perform Auto-Tuning.
The drive is operating in a vector control mode but
Calculate the motor value and reset the motor parameters.
Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed.
Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0).
When a motor is connected to the drive output terminals (U, V, W), a surge voltage
is generated between the drives switching and motors winding coil. Generally, the
Insufficient voltage insulation between motor phases. maximum surge voltage is about 1.5 times the Power Cell input power supply
voltage (1500 V with a 1200 V input).
Use a motor with a voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge.
The motor fan has stopped or is clogged.
Check the motor fan.
182
Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning

Cause
Possible Solutions
The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for the Check to see that the A1-02 (Control Method Selection) is set to 0 (V/f control).
selected control mode.
Select the correct control mode at A1-02.
Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads/Acceleration Time is Too

Long
Cause
Torque limit has been reached or current suppression
keeps the drive from accelerating.
Load is too heavy.

Torque limit is not set properly.
Frequency reference is too low.
Load is too heavy.
Acceleration time has been set too long.

Although the drive is operating in vector motor
control method, Auto-Tuning has not been performed.
Incorrect frequency reference setting.
The Stall Prevention level during acceleration set too

low.
The Stall Prevention level during run has been set too
low.
Drive reached the limitations of the V/f motor control
method.
Possible Solutions
Take the following steps to resolve the problem:
Reduce the load.
Increase motor capacity.
Note: Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque
Compensation Limit function, accelerating too quickly or trying
to drive an excessively large load can exceed the capabilities of
the motor.
Check the torque limit setting.
Check the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Increase E1-04 if it is set too low.
Check U1-01 for proper frequency reference.
Check if a frequency reference switch signal has been set to one of the sequence
input terminals.
If analog input is used, check for a low gain level set for terminal L1 (H3-03).
Reduce the load so that the output current remains within the motor rated current.
Note: In extruder and mixer applications, the load will sometimes
increase as the temperature drops.
Increase the acceleration time.
Check if the mechanical brake is fully releasing as it should.
Check if the acceleration time parameters have been set too long (C1-01, C1-03,
C1-05, C1-07).
Calculate motor data and reset motor parameters.
Switch to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0).
Analog input terminal L1 is set for frequency gain (H3-02 is set to 1), but there is
no voltage or current input provided.
Make sure H3-02 is set to the proper values.
See if the analog input value is set to the right value (U1-13).
Check the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
If L3-02 is set too low, acceleration may be taking too long.
Increase L3-02.
Check the Stall Prevention level during run (L3-06).
If L3-06 is set too low, speed will drop as the drive outputs torque.
Increase the setting value.
If the motor cable is long (50 m or more), run Auto-Tuning only for Line-to-Line
Resistance.
Consider switching to vector control mode.
Cause
The analog input gain and bias for the frequency
reference input are set to incorrect values.
A frequency bias signal is being entered via analog
input terminal L1
Troubleshooting
Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency Reference

Command
Possible Solutions
Check the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs that are used to set the
frequency reference. Check parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for input L1.
Set these parameters to the appropriate values.
The analog input setting (H3-02) is the sum of the individual input values.
Make sure that H3-02 is set appropriately.
Check that the analog input level is appropriate (U1-13).
183

Cause
PID control is enabled.
Possible Solutions
If PID control is not necessary for the application, disable it by setting b5-01 to 0.
Note: When PID control is enabled, the drive adjusts the output
frequency to match the PID setpoint. The drive will only
accelerate to the maximum output frequency set in E1-04 while
PID control is enabled.
Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation

Cause
Poor balance between motor phases.
Hunting prevention function is disabled.
Possible Solutions
Check drive input power voltage to ensure that it provides stable power, or disable
input phase loss detection.
Enable Hunting Prevention (n1-01 = 1).
Increase the AFR gain (n2-01) or the AFR time constant (n2-02).
Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On

Cause
Relay switching in the drive generates excessive
noise.
Possible Solutions
Ground the drive (EA) and motor (ED).
Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines.
Make sure wires and the motor have been properly grounded.
Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates

Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery
Cause
Possible Solutions
Adjust the parameters used for the Jump frequency function (d3-01 through d3The drive output frequency is the same as the resonant
04) to skip the problem-causing bandwidth.
frequency of the connected machinery.
Place the motor on a rubber pad to reduce vibration.
Oscillation or Hunting
Cause
Insufficient tuning.
Gain is too low when using PID control.
The frequency reference is assigned to an external
source and the signal is noisy.
The cable between the drive and motor is too long.
Possible Solutions
Adjust the parameters. Refer to Motor Performance Fine-Tuning on page 138.
Make the adjustments by referring to the information on the PID control
parameters (b5-) in the separate FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide.
Ensure that noise is not affecting the signal lines.
Separate main circuit wiring and control circuit wiring.
Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.
Increase the analog input time filter constant (H3-13).
Reduce the length of the cable.
PID Output Fault

Cause
No PID feedback input.
The level of detection and the target value do not

correspond with each other.
184
Possible Solutions
Check that B (PID feedback) has been set for H3-02 (function selection for
analog input terminal L1).
Check that assignment to the analog input terminal and the actual signal input
match.
Check the connection of the feedback signal.
Check the various PID-related parameter settings.
Note: No PID feedback input to the terminal causes the value detected
to be 0, causing a PID fault and the drive to operate at max
frequency.
PID control keeps the difference between target and detection values at 0. Set the
input level for the values relative to one another.
Use analog input gain H3-11 to adjust PID target and feedback signal scaling.

Cause
Reverse drive output frequency and speed detection.
When output frequency rises, the sensor detects a
speed decrease.
Adjustment made to PID parameter settings are
insufficient.
Possible Solutions
Set PID output for reverse characteristics (b5-09 = 1).
Make the adjustments by referring to the information on the PID control
parameters (b5-) in the separate FSDrive-MV1000 Parameter Guide.
Insufficient Starting Torque

Cause
Possible Solutions
Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed (required for
Perform Auto-Tuning. Refer to Motor Performance Fine-Tuning on page 138.
vector control modes).
The control mode was changed after performing
Perform Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning.
Only Stationary Auto-Tuning was performed.
Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off (Motor Rotates During DC Injection
Braking)
Cause
DC Injection Braking is set too low and the drive
cannot decelerate properly.
The stopping method is set so that the drive coasts to
stop.
Possible Solutions
Adjust the DC Injection braking settings.
Increase the current level for DC Injection Braking (b2-02).
Increase the DC Injection Braking time at stop (b2-04).
Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0 or 2.
Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference

Cause
Possible Solutions
Adjust the parameters used for the Jump frequency function (d3-01, d3-02, d3Frequency reference is set within the range of the
03, d3-04).
Jump frequency.
Note: Enabling the Jump frequency prevents the drive from outputting
the frequencies specified in the Jump range.
Set the maximum output frequency and the upper limit for the frequency
Upper limit for the frequency reference has been
reference to more appropriate values (E1-04, d2-01).
exceeded.
Note: The following calculation yields the upper value for the output
frequency = E1-04 x d2-01 / 100
Large load triggered Stall Prevention function during Reduce the load.
acceleration.
Adjust the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
Motor Does Not Restart after Power Loss

Possible Solutions
Check the sequence and wiring that has been set up to enter the Run command.
The Run command was not issued again when power
A relay should be set up to make sure the Run command remains enabled
was restored.
throughout any power loss.
Troubleshooting
Cause
185
186
6
Periodic Inspection & Maintenance
This chapter describes the method for periodic inspection and maintenance of the drive and
also the part replacement method for the cooling fan, etc.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERIODIC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING THE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING THE COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING POWER CELLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
190
194
195
197
200
202
187
6.1 Section Safety
6.1
Section Safety
DANGER


precautions should be taken to prevent burns. When replacing the cooling fan, shut off the main circuit's power and
then wait at least 15 minutes. Then, shut off the control circuit's power and make sure that the cooling fan has fully
stopped before starting the work.
Never connect or disconnect wiring, remove connectors or option cards, or replace the cooling fan, while the power is
on.

Disconnect the power to the drive and check that there is no residual charge in it before starting servicing.
Do not supply power to the main circuit while drive covers are removed.

The diagrams in this section may show the drive without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall
covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
WARNING

Improper equipment grounding could result in death, serious injury, or fire by contacting the motor case.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
You could sustain an electric shock.

Do not touch the input and output terminals directly with your hands and do not bring the input and output wires into
contact with the drives case.


work on the drive.
Fire Hazard

188
6.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Incorrect handling could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.




Connect the wires with the correct phase order.
The motor will run in reverse if the phase orders are not matched.
Connect input terminals U, V and W of the motor to output terminals U, V and W of the drive, pairing the terminal
codes. The phase orders of the motor terminals and drive terminals should also match.
Do not operate damaged equipment.

Maintenance
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.

Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
189
6.2 Periodic Inspection
6.2
Periodic Inspection
Electronic devices have a limited life and may exhibit changes in characteristics or performance deterioration after years
of use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance on the
drive, including daily and regular inspections, and part replacement.
Drives comprise semiconductor parts such as IGBT devices (power transistors) and integrated circuits and electronic
components like capacitors and resistors, along with many parts such as fans and relays, and the proper functioning of
drives is dependent on the correct operation of all these parts.
Follow the inspection checklists provided in this section as a part of a regular maintenance program. Perform equipment
inspections at intervals of one year after installation.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is used under harsh conditions, such as:
High ambient temperatures

Frequent starting and stopping
Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
Excessive vibration or shock
Atmospheres containing dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine
Poor storage conditions.
Daily Inspection
Table 6.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to
avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the Checked column
after each inspection.
Table 6.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Category
Details of Inspection
Checked
Check the ambient temperature.

Ambient Environment
Check the humidity.

Check for toxic gas.
Check for adhesion of dust, oil mist, etc.
Equipment in General
Power Supply Voltage
Transformer
Cooling System
Check for abnormal vibration and noise.

Check the power supply voltage for the main circuit and controls. (Check the indication on
the gage of the power supply unit.)
Check for odor and abnormal noise.
Check the cooling fan for abnormal vibration or noise.
Check the air filter for soiling.
Lamp
Check if any lamp is blown.
Meters
Check if the meter indication is normal.
190
Periodic Inspection
Table 6.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drives. Although periodic inspections should
generally be performed once a year or every two years, the drive may require more frequent inspection in harsh
environments or with rigorous use. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in performance or
product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the Checked column after each inspection.
Periodic Inspection
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not perform inspection while the power for the main circuit and controls is on. Failure to
comply could result in death or serious injury. Before starting inspection, disconnect the power supply to all the
equipment. Internal capacitors retain some charge even after the main circuit power supply is turned off. Wait at least 15
minutes after turning the power off.
Table 6.2 Periodic Inspection Checklist

Location
Inspection Category
Entire transformer and

Power Cell panel
Wires
Transformer
Transformer Panel
Power Cell Panel
Power Cells
Surge absorber
Circuits
Relays
Control Panel
Board
Details of Inspection
Megger check between the main circuit terminals and ground
terminal
Check for loose screws, bolts, or connectors.
Check for damage to, or deformation or discoloration of parts
due to overheating or deterioration.
Check for soiling or adhesion of dust, etc.
Check for damage or deterioration of the cable sheath.
Check the windings for damage, and check for breakage in the
insulation sheets.
Check the windings for accumulation of dust, and for
adhesion of foreign matter.
Check for leakage from the smoothing capacitor.
Confirm that the safety valve of the smoothing capacitor is not
protruding.
Confirm that the smoothing capacitor has not expanded.
Measure the capacitance of the smoothing capacitor.
(Check the indication on the gage.)
Check for loose screws or bolts.
Check that the main circuit fuse and the control fuses on the
boards are normal.
Check for accumulated dust and dirt on the heat sink.
Make sure the appearance is clean, the terminals are tight, and
the installation bolts are securely fastened.
Confirm no abnormalities in protective and indication circuits.
Confirm that there is no chattering noise during operation.
Confirm timer operation.
Check for damaged contacts.
Check for abnormal smells and discoloration.
Confirm the power supply voltage.
Page
Checked
192
192
192
193
193
Check for loose screws or bolts.
Air filter
Cooling System
Cooling fan
Check for soiling of the digital operator.

Check for dirty or clogged filter.
Confirm the bearing operation.
193
193

Maintenance
Digital Operator
Make sure data appears on the digital operator properly.
191

Carry out periodic inspections in the manner described below.
Megger Check (Measurement of Insulation Resistance)
Measure Insulation Resistance of the Drive Primary Circuit
Use a 1000 V Megger insulation resistance tester.

The measured insulation resistance must be 30 M or more.
As the primary circuit is grounded at high-resistance for input voltage detection, disconnect the wiring to the voltage
detection resistor before measuring insulation resistance.
Measure Insulation Resistance of the Drive Secondary Circuit (Motor Side)

The secondary circuit is grounded at high-resistance for output voltage detection and ground-fault detection. Disconnect
the high-resistance resistor for voltage detection and Power Cell output cables connected to the output terminals before
measuring insulation resistance.
Measure Insulation Resistance of the Surge Absorber

Note: Make sure that the surge absorber has been removed from the circuit.
Screws, Bolts, and Connectors

Looseness in the wiring connections of the main circuit cable could lead to fire due to overheating of the connections.
During periodic inspections, be sure to retighten the screws and bolts, and to reinsert the connector securely. For the
tightening torque of the screws and bolts, refer to the following recommendations.
M8 bolts: 8.9 Nxm to 10.8 Nxm

M10 bolts: 18 Nxm to 23 Nxm
M12 bolts: 31.5 Nxm to 39.5 Nxm
M16 bolts: 78.5 Nxm to 98 Nxm
Check the following items.
High-voltage input terminals, high-voltage output terminals

Input voltage detection circuit (option), output voltage detection circuit
Transformer primary terminals/primary voltage tap terminals
Transformer secondary terminals
Power Cell I/O terminals and optical fiber cable connector
Power Cell screws, bolts, and connectors
Control power supply input terminals
Control transformer I/O terminals (option)
Power relay I/O terminals for cooling fans
Screws, bolts, and connectors of each control board
Control I/O terminals
Transformer
Check for anything abnormal in the external appearance.
Check for discoloration indicating burn marks.
Check for accumulated dirt or dust.
If you find any, clean it away.
Check for loose bolts in the I/O terminals and tap terminals.
If there are any, retighten them with the stipulated tightening torque.
192

Power Cell
Check for discoloration indicating burn marks.

Check for leakage from the smoothing capacitor.
Check for protrusion or expansion of the safety valves.
Check for loose bolts in the input terminals (L1, L2, L3) and the output terminals (T1, T2).
If there are any, retighten them.
Check if the optical fiber cable connector is loose.
If it is, re-insert it.
Check for loose screws and bolts inside Power Cells.
Check the main circuit fuse and control fuse on the board for discoloration and partial looseness.
Check for accumulation of dirt and dust on the heat sink.
If you find any, remove it with dried compressed air at 39.2 104 to 58.8 104 Pa (4 to 6 kgxcm2).
Air Filter
If the air filter is soiled or clogged with dirt and dust, the cooling capacity of the drive will be degraded, resulting in
abnormal temperature rise. Check the air filter for dirt and dust at each periodic inspection, and clean it with neutral
detergent every six months.
Board
Check the board for abnormal odors or discoloration.
Check for loose screws or connectors.
Cooling Fan
Check for loose installation bolts.
Insulation resistance of the cooling fans motor
Use a 500 V Megger insulation resistance tester. The measured insulation resistance must be 10 M or more.
Cooling fan motor bearing
The service life of the bearing is approximately 40,000 hours.
Figure 6.1
A
B
U V

Maintenance
Transformer panel
A Cooling fan
B Power Cells
Power Cell panel Control panel

E Transformer
F Main circuit input terminals
Figure 6.1 Internal Layout Diagram (Drive: 6-kV Class, 1600 kVA)
193
6.3 Maintenance
6.3
Maintenance
In order to keep the drive operating reliably over a long period of time, we recommend replacing consumable parts.
To keep the drive operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to carry out periodical inspections and to
replace the consumable parts in accordance with their service lives. Periodic inspection standards vary, depending on the
drive installation environment and usage conditions. Carry out periodic maintenance by referring to Table 6.1.
For details on replacing batteries, see Replacing the Battery on page 195.
For details on replacing the cooling fan, see Replacing the Cooling Fan on page 197.
For details on replacing Power Cells, see Replacing Power Cells on page 200.
For the replacement of other parts, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office. These
replacements must be undertaken by trained professionals.
Cooling fan
Contactor for cooling fan
Power Cell smoothing capacitor
Inrush prevention relay
IGBT
Fuses
Aluminum capacitor on the printed circuit board
Batteries (lithium batteries)
Circuit breakers
Other relays
Part Replacement Guidelines

Table 6.3 shows the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of the drive. Only
use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and version.
Table 6.3 Standard Replacement Period
Part Name
Cooling fan
Power Cell smoothing

capacitor
Fuses
Aluminum capacitor on the
printed circuit board
Battery (lithium battery)
Circuit breaker
Standard Replacement
Period <1>
3 to 4 years
(40,000 service hours)
5 years
Replacement Method and Remarks

Replace with a new fan.
(Determine replacement need after inspection.)
Replace with a new capacitor.
10 years
Replace with new fuses.
5 years
Replace with a new board.

5 years
Replace with a new battery (connect the battery to the control board with
the connector).
Product name: CR6L-CN014S manufactured by FDK Corporation
Specifications: 3 V/2000 mAh
Determine replacement need after inspection.
NOTICE: The standard replacement period is based on the conditions listed below. The times stated are for guidance, and the lives of
the parts are not guaranteed for these times. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments
or rigorous use.
Usage conditions for standard replacement period:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30C
Load factor: 80% maximum
194
6.4 Replacing the Battery
6.4
Replacing the Battery
A battery for memory backup is provided in the controller.

When the battery voltage drops below 2.1 V, BAT (meaning low battery voltage) will be displayed on the digital operator,
and the LED indicator BAT on the control board will light up. When this happens, replace the battery.
We recommend replacing the battery every 5 years even if no alarm is detected. The battery replacement interval is
indicated on a dedicated nameplate on the controller.
Use battery model CR6L-CN014S.
Note: Do not turn off the control power with an alarm detected.
Failure to comply may result in loss of the data and the calendar settings stored in the backup memory.
If the control power is turned on when the battery voltage is less than 2.1 V, the backup data will be automatically cleared.
Battery Replacement Procedure

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury. The drive should be installed, wired, repaired, inspected, and have its parts replaced, by
someone with a thorough knowledge of drive installation, adjustment and repair.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when replacing electrical components.
NOTICE: Be careful not to short-circuit the battery connector when removing or mounting the battery or cleaning the connector.
If the connector is short-circuited, backup data may be lost.
Note: Replace the battery while the control power is being supplied.
If the control power has been shut off, replace the battery within one hour. The data is backed up by the built-in capacitor for this
time even if there is no battery.
If the control power is off for more than an hour, the backup data may be corrupted. In this case, turn on the control power with
the battery removed to clear the backup data and then set the battery.
Replace the battery by using the following procedure.

1. Shut off the main circuit power and wait at least 15 minutes.
2. Remove the cover from the controller.
3. Remove the battery connector (CN24).
Note: Clean the battery connector with alcohol or equivalent if there is dust or oil on the connector.
Remove the battery from the battery holder.

Mount a new battery in the battery holder. Take care to ensure that the cable is not trapped.
Confirm the polarities and connect the battery to the connector (CN24).
Check that the battery alarm LED indicator has gone off.
Add the date for when the battery should be replaced next to the battery label.

Maintenance
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
195
6.4 Replacing the Battery
Figure 6.2
Controller
BAT
ERR
RUN
PWR
CN24
A Control board
B Battery alarm LED indicator
C Battery label
D Battery
E Battery connector (CN24)
Figure 6.2 Replacing the Battery
196
6.5 Replacing the Cooling Fan
6.5
Replacing the Cooling Fan
NOTICE: Use a cooling fan that is specified for use in combination with the drive. If the fan is replaced with one other than the
stipulated type, the drive may not be capable of its intended performance.
To get a cooling fan replaced, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
For drives with multiple cooling fans, replace all of the fans at the same time to maximize the drives service life.
Models and Number of Cooling Fans Used

Control
Power
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Power
Supply
Frequency
(Hz)
Transformer Panel
Model
CIMR-MV2
Qty
Model/
Specifications
Qty
AAA052
AAA058
AAA077
AAA093
AAA102
AAA115
AAA135
AAA160
2
200/220
60
AAA205 <1>
AAA220 <1>
AAA180
AAA330 <1>
AAA390 <1>
AAA440 <1>
AAA505 <1>
8
5
CCA035
CCA050
CCA070
CCA100
CCA200
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
CCA260
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
CCA140
50/60
3
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
AAA600 <1>
200/220
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
AAA280 <1>
AAA550 <1>
Model/
Specifications
Power Cell Panel
4
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
CCA330
CCA400
CCA520
CCA650
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W

Maintenance
Voltage
Class
(kV)
197
Voltage
Class
(kV)
Control
Power
Supply
Voltage
(V)
200/220
Power
Supply
Frequency
(Hz)
60
Transformer Panel
Model
CIMR-MV2
DDA052
DDA058
DDA064
DDA077
DDA093
DDA102
DDA115
DDA125
DDA155
DDA190
DDA220 <1>
Model/
Specifications
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
11
200/220
200/220
50/60
50/60
FFA520
FFA650
HHA035
HHA050
HHA070
HHA100
HHA140
HHA200
HHA260 <1>
HHA330 <1>
HHA400 <1>
HHA520 <1>
HHA650 <1>
Qty
Model/
Specifications
Qty
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
DDA250 <1>
DDA285 <1>
DDA315 <1>
DDA340 <1>
DDA375 <1>
DDA440 <1>
DDA505 <1>
DDA575 <1>
DDA625 <1>
FFA035
FFA050
FFA070
FFA100
FFA140
FFA200
FFA260
FFA330
FFA400
Power Cell Panel
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
8
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
5
7
8
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
3
3
4
5
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G250-BC54-01,
169W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
S3G400-KC22-51,
375W
4
4
4
4
6
6
7
8
5
5
2
2
2
2
3
4
6
7
4
5
7
2
2
2
3
3
4
3
3
4
5
6
198
Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure

Replace cooling fans by using the following procedure. The general steps are given here. For details, contact your
Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power for the main circuit and controls is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Before starting inspection, disconnect the power supply to all
the equipment. Internal capacitors retain some charge even after the main circuit power supply is turned off. After
shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
Removal
1. Remove the drive ventilation covers mounting screws, then remove the ventilation cover at the top of the drive.
CAUTION! Take due care not to drop any of the mounting screws inside the drive.
2. Disconnect the cooling fan cables from the relay terminals.

3. Remove the cooling fan mounting screws.
4. Pull the cooling fan upward to remove.
Figure 6.3
A Cooling fan
B Ventilation cover
C Ventilation cover mounting screws (M6)

D Relay terminal
Figure 6.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Drive: 6-kV Class, 1600 kVA)
Mounting
NOTICE: Arrange the cooling fan cables so that they will not make contact with, or be caught in, the fan blades.

Maintenance
1. Set the new cooling fan in place and tighten the mounting screws.
2. Reinstall the components in the reverse order of removal.
199
6.6 Replacing Power Cells
6.6
Replacing Power Cells
Power Cell Replacement Procedure

The general steps are given here. For details, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Never connect or disconnect wiring, remove connectors or option cards, while the power is
on. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect the power for the main circuit and controls to
the drive and check that there is no residual charge in it before starting servicing.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury. The drive should be installed, wired, repaired, inspected, and have its parts replaced, by
someone with a thorough knowledge of drive installation, adjustment and repair.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Removal
Replace Power Cells by following the procedure below.
1. Disconnect the optical fiber cable from the cell control board (CCB). Take care not to damage the cable when
pulling out the Power Cell.
Figure 6.4
A
C
A Optical fiber cable

B Output terminals (T1, T2)
C Input terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Figure 6.4 Disconnecting the Power Cell Wiring
2. Disconnect the three phase wiring from the input terminals (L1, L2, L3), and the wiring (copper bars or wires)
3.
4.
5.
6.
from the output terminals (T1, T2).

Pull the Power Cell out about 100 mm toward front.
Fit the lifter platform at that position to place it under the Power Cell.
Draw the Power Cell out by pulling on the handle on its front face.
Shift the whole Power Cell onto the platform of the dedicated lifter.
CAUTION! Do not pull too strongly when pulling the Power Cell out.
Otherwise, the Power Cell may fly out and your hands or fingers could get caught.
Figure 6.5
B
D
A Drive
B Power Cells
D Fix the lifter at the appropriate height for

the Power Cell.
E Pull the Power Cell out about 100 mm
toward front.
C Lifter
Figure 6.5 Drawing Out a Power Cell
200
6.6 Replacing Power Cells

7. Secure the Power Cell on the platform with a belt or other means to prevent falling and move the Power Cell to a
stable position.
Figure 6.6
A Drive
B Lifter
C Belt to prevent falling

Figure 6.6 Moving A Power Cell
Mounting
Mount a Power Cell by following the procedure for removal in reverse.
1. Move the Power Cell, loaded on a lifter, to the front of the drive panel in which the Power Cell is to be
accommodated.
2. Push the Power Cell in from the front and mount it.
Figure 6.7
A
B
A Drive
B Power Cells
C Lifter
D Fix the lifter at the appropriate height for
the Power Cell.
Figure 6.7 Inserting a Power Cell
3. Connect the three-phase input wiring to the input terminals (L1, L2, L3), and connect the wiring to the output
terminals (T1, T2).
4. Connect the optical fiber cable to the cell control board (CCB).
Figure 6.8
A Optical fiber cable

B Output terminals (T1, T2)

Maintenance
C Input terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Figure 6.8 Wiring of Power Cells
201
6.7 Spare Parts
6.7
Spare Parts
Spare Parts
Considering the importance of the system in which the drive is used, it is recommended that spare parts be prepared in
advance to cover all eventualities for maintenance management. Check the following points before ordering spare parts
from your nearest Yaskawa representative or Yaskawa sales office.
Drive: Model, capacity, and Yaskawa order number
Spare parts: Part name, model, and quantity
Board
Table 6.4 Spare Part Model List (Boards)
Category
Part Name
Cell control board (CCB)
Power Cell related
Gate drive board (GDB)
Panel
related
Controller
Voltage detection board (VDB)

Control board (CNT)
Optical expansion board
(EO-EXT)
Isolation board (ISO)
Relay board (RLB)
Fan fault detection board (FFB)
Current detection resistor board

(IDB)
(option)
202
Model
JEBC-61406-0
JEBC-61511-0
JEBC-61511-1
JEBC-61511-2
JEBC-61511-3
JEBC-61511-4
JEBC-61511-5
JEBC-61511-6
JEBC-61511-7
JEBC-61511-8
JEBC-61511-9
JEBC-61511-A
JEBC-61912
JEBC-61304-INV
Remarks
Common to all capacities
For Power Cells: 35 A
Common to all capacities
The board that controls the drive
JEBC-61610
Applicable for the 10 kV input voltage class
JEBC-61701
JEBC-61913
JEBC-61703
JEBC-61902-1
JEBC-61902-2
JEBC-61902-4
JEBC-61902-5
JEBC-61902-7
JEBC-61902-8
For I/O voltage detection

For the I/O interface
For fan drive and fault detection
47 (varies depending on the drive)
6.7 Spare Parts

Power Cell Related
The models with procurement codes that end in "T" are for 3kV-class drive. These parts cannot be used for other class.
Class: 2 kV
Table 6.5 Spare Part Model List: 2-kV Class (Power Cells)
Power Cell Rating
35 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
140 A
200 A
260 A
330 A
400 A
520 A
650 A
Procurement Code
7910251-1010
7910251-1020
7910251-1030
7910251-1040
7910251-1050
7910251-1060
7910251-1070
7910251-1080
7910251-1090
7910251-1100
7910251-1110
Model
JESD-MV2S12035
JESD-MV2S12050
JESD-MV2S12070
JESD-MV2S12100
JESD-MV2S12140
JESD-MV2S12200
JESD-MV2S12260
JESD-MV2S12330
JESD-MV2S12400
JESD-MV2S12520
JESD-MV2S12650
Specifications
700 Vac, 35 A rating
Class: 3 kV
Power Cell Rating
35 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
140 A
200 A
260 A
330 A
400 A
520 A
650 A
Procurement Code
7910251-1010
7910251-1020
7910251-1030
7910251-1040
7910251-1050
7910251-1060
7910251-1070
7910251-1080
7910251-1090
7910251-1100
7910251-1110
Model
JESD-MV2S12035
JESD-MV2S12050
JESD-MV2S12070
JESD-MV2S12100
JESD-MV2S12140
JESD-MV2S12200
JESD-MV2S12260
JESD-MV2S12330
JESD-MV2S12400
JESD-MV2S12520
JESD-MV2S12650
Specifications
Class: 4 kV
Procurement Code
7910251-1010
7910251-1020
7910251-1030
7910251-1040
7910251-1050
7910251-1060
7910251-1070
7910251-1080
7910251-1090
7910251-1100
7910251-1110
Model
JESD-MV2S12035
JESD-MV2S12050
JESD-MV2S12070
JESD-MV2S12100
JESD-MV2S12140
JESD-MV2S12200
JESD-MV2S12260
JESD-MV2S12330
JESD-MV2S12400
JESD-MV2S12520
JESD-MV2S12650
Specifications

Maintenance
Power Cell Rating

35 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
140 A
200 A
260 A
330 A
400 A
520 A
650 A
203
6.7 Spare Parts

Class: 6 kV
Power Cell Rating
35 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
140 A
200 A
260 A
330 A
400 A
520 A
650 A
Procurement Code
7910251-1010
7910251-1020
7910251-1030
7910251-1040
7910251-1050
7910251-1060
7910251-1070
7910251-1080
7910251-1090
7910251-1100
7910251-1110
Model
JESD-MV2S12035
JESD-MV2S12050
JESD-MV2S12070
JESD-MV2S12100
JESD-MV2S12140
JESD-MV2S12200
JESD-MV2S12260
JESD-MV2S12330
JESD-MV2S12400
JESD-MV2S12520
JESD-MV2S12650
Specifications
Class: 11 kV
Power Cell Rating
35 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
140 A
200 A
260 A
330 A
400 A
520 A
650 A
Procurement Code
7910251-1010
7910251-1020
7910251-1030
7910251-1040
7910251-1050
7910251-1060
7910251-1070
7910251-1080
7910251-1090
7910251-1100
7910251-1110
Model
JESD-MV2S12035
JESD-MV2S12050
JESD-MV2S12070
JESD-MV2S12100
JESD-MV2S12140
JESD-MV2S12200
JESD-MV2S12260
JESD-MV2S12330
JESD-MV2S12400
JESD-MV2S12520
JESD-MV2S12650
Specifications
Panel Related
Table 6.10 Spare Part Model List (Panel Related)
Part Name
Digital operator
Cooling fan
Shutter
204
Model
JVOP-180
S3G250-BC54-01
S3G400-KA22-71
PS-30SMTA
PS-50SMTA
Remarks
Varies depending on the drive. Refer to Models and

Number of Cooling Fans Used on page 197.
Shutter (option) for cooling fan (S3G250)
Shutter (option) for cooling fan (S3G400)
6.7 Spare Parts
Storing Spare Parts

When keeping Power Cells, boards, or cooling fans in reserve, observe the following precautions to secure the life and
reliability.
Do not unpack the product to store.
When putting a board into storage after having unpacked it, enclose the board in a conductive, sealed bag.
Protect the product not to be directly loaded during storage.
Storage Location
Store in a location with an ambient temperature of -5C to +40C, a relative humidity of no greater than 85%, with no
condensation or freezing.
Store in a location where there is no exposure to direct sunlight.
For storage over short periods (around a month), for example during transportation, a temperature range of -20 to 60C
is permissible.
Pack and store the products in such a way that they will not be affected by shock and vibration during transportation.
Avoid storing the products in a location subjected to dusts and oil mist, such as cement factory and spinning mill.
Avoid storing the products in a location subjected to corrosive gas, such as chemical factory, refinery, and sewage
plant.
Avoid storing the products in a location where there is a risk of salt damage, such as a location near the beach, and in
salt damaged areas.
Avoid storing products in a location subject to unfavorable conditions; they should be stored in a warehouse, office, or
similar location.
Measures Against Power Cell Deterioration
To avoid deterioration of the Power Cells smoothing capacitor, apply voltage to it every six months.
Use a variable power supply to apply voltage. Increase the voltage applied gradually over two to three minutes and then
continue to apply the voltage for at least one hour with no load. For details, see When Using an AC Variable Power
Supply (Single-phase/Three-phase) on page 205 and When Using a DC Variable Power Supply on page 205.
When using a spare Power Cell for the first time after the Power Cell was replaced and loaded into the drive panel, leave
the main circuit power supply on continuously for twenty minutes after voltage was first applied to the Power Cell. Then
the smoothing capacitors of the Power Cell will become stable.
Note: A variable power supply to be provided by the customer.
Figure 6.9
Variable power supply

L1
Power supply
L2
L3
T1
T2
Power cell
(Example: for 200 A)
Figure 6.9 Applying Voltage to the Power Cell

Maintenance
When Using an AC Variable Power Supply (Single-phase/Three-phase)
1. Connect a single-phase variable power supply to terminals L1 and L2 (or L3).

Connect a three-phase variable power supply to terminals L1, L2 and L3.
2. Gradually increase the voltage from 0 to 600 Vac.
Note: If there has been no voltage application for two years or longer, gradually increase the voltage over 2 to 3 minutes.
When Using a DC Variable Power Supply
1. Connect the power supply to the terminals L1 and L2 (or L3).

2. Gradually increase the voltage from 0 to 800 Vdc.
Note: If there has been no voltage application for two years or longer, gradually increase the voltage over 2 to 3 minutes.
205
6.7 Spare Parts
206
7
Options
This chapter describes the options that can be used with this drive.
7.1
7.2
SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
207
7.1 Section Safety
7.1
Section Safety
DANGER


The internal capacitor remains charged even after the drive input power is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait
for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
Do not supply power to the main circuit while drive covers are removed.

The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or
shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
WARNING

Do not remove covers of the drive or touch circuit boards while the main circuit power is on.



work on the drive.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Fire Hazard
NOTICE

Never disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
208
7.2 Options
7.2
Options
The list of options is shown below. To order an option, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa
sales office.
Selecting options: For details on procurement, see the Yaskawa catalogs.
Installing and wiring options: Refer to the manual for each option.
Built-in Type
All built-in type options are connected to the connectors on the controller board.
Table 7.1 Options
Type
Name
Analog Input
AI-A3
Speed (Frequency)
Reference Card
Digital Input
DI-A3
DeviceNet Interface
SI-N3
PROFIBUS-DP
Interface
SI-P3
Communications
Card <1>
CP-215 Interface
215IF
Ethernet (CP-218)
Interface
218IF
Analog Monitor
AO-A3
Monitor Card
Reference Manual
Analog Input
Installation Manual
(TOBPC73060038)
Digital Input
Installation Manual
(TOBPC73060039)
DeviceNet Installation
Used for running or stopping the drive, setting or referencing
Manual (TOBPC73060043)
parameters, and monitoring output frequency, output current, or similar
DeviceNet Technical
items through DeviceNet communication with the host controller.
Manual (SIEPC73060043)
PROFIBUS-DP
Installation Manual
Used for running or stopping the drive, setting or referencing
parameters, and monitoring output frequency, output current, or similar (TOBPC73060042)
items through PROFIBUS-DP communication with the host controller. PROFIBUS-DP Technical
Manual (SIEPC73060042)
Used for running or stopping the drive, setting or viewing parameters,
and monitoring output frequency, output current, etc. through CP-215
communication with the host controller.
<3>
The CP-215 communication system is a high-speed, real-time, N:N
network with shared memory, handling both cyclic and message
transmissions. An optional expansion PLC board (BC-620) is needed
to use it and should be procured at the same time.
Used for running or stopping the drive, setting or viewing parameters,
and monitoring output frequency, output current, etc. through CP-218
communication with the host controller.
The CP-218 communication system is a type of Ethernet that supports <3>
communication with the MEMOBUS protocol, non-protocol, or
MELSEC protocol. An optional expansion PLC board (BC-620) is
needed to use it and should be procured at the same time.
Outputs analog signal for monitoring drive output state (output freq.,
output current etc.).
Analog Monitor
Output resolution: 11 bit signed (1/2048)
Installation Manual
Output voltage: -10 to +10 Vdc (non-isolated)
(TOBPC73060040)
Terminals: 2 analog outputs
Outputs isolated type digital signal for monitoring drive run state
(alarm signal, zero speed detection, etc.)
Digital Output
Terminals: 6 photocoupler outputs (48 V, 50 mA or less)
Installation Manual
2 relay contact outputs (250 Vac 1 A or less, 30 Vdc 1 A (TOBPC73060041)
or less)
Options
Digital Output
DO-A3
Function
Enables high-precision and high-resolution analog speed reference
setting.
Input signal level: -10 to +10 Vdc (20 k), 4 to 20 mA (500 )
Input channels: 3 channels (DIP switch for input voltage/input
current selection)
Input resolution: Input voltage 13 bit signed (1/8192)
Input current 1/6554
Enables 16-bit digital speed reference setting.
Input signal: 16 bit binary, 4 digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
Input current: 8 mA
User-set: 8 bit, 12 bit, 16 bit
7
209
7.2 Options
Type
PG Speed
Controller Card <2>
PLC Function
Name
Function
For control modes requiring a PG encoder for motor feedback.
Complementary Type Phase A, B, and Z pulse (3-phase) inputs (complementary type)
PG Interface
Max. input frequency: 50 kHz
PG-B3
Pulse monitor output: Open collector, +24 V, max. current 30 mA
Power supply output for PG: +12 V, max. current 200 mA
For control modes requiring a PG encoder for motor feedback.
Line Driver PG
Phase A, B, and Z pulse (differential pulse) inputs (RS-422)
Interface
Max. input frequency: 300 kHz
PG-X3
Pulse monitor output: RS-422
Power supply output for PG: +5 V or +12 V, max. current 200 mA
Supplements PLC functions required to customize the drive.
Expansion PLC Board Program memory capacity: Equivalent to 8,000 steps
BC-620
Execution speed: 1,000 steps/1 ms
Language: Ladder language, textual language
Reference Manual
Complementary Type PG
Installation Manual
(TOBPC73060036)
Motor PG Feedback
Line Driver Interface
Installation Manual
(TOBPC73060037)
<3>
<1> Only one optional communication card can be selected.

<2> To apply PG control, the PG speed control card must be selected.
<3> Documentation is being prepared.
Panel Housed Type

Table 7.2 Options
Type
Name
Momentary
Power Loss
Compensation
Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) Unit
Continuation of
Operation
Backup Cooling Fan <1>
Measures for Cold

Regions
Space Heater
Panel Door Open Interlock
Function
Reference Manual
UPS is installed inside the panel and backs up a control power supply
when momentary power losses occur.
This option is required to implement measures against momentary

power loss (for the speed search function or KEB function)
Automatically enables continued operation of the drive in case of one
<2>
of the cooling fans fails to operate. (N + 1 backup system)
Suppresses dew condensation inside the panel by adding a space
heater circuit.
Note: This option does not always prevent dew
condensation. Use the drive in an environment

with no dew condensation.
Detects opening of the panel door by adding a limit switch.
Medium-voltage power shutdown command is output on detecting
opening.

Separate Installation Type

Table 7.3 Options
Type
Name
Maintenance
USB Copy Unit

JVOP-181
Power Cell
Replacement
Lifter for Replacing

Power Cells
Installation
Inrush Current
Suppression
Circuit <1>
Function
Reference Manual
Enables the copying and transfer of parameters between drives
using (one-touch) simple operations. This unit can also be used as
a conversion connector between the communication port (RJ-45)
<2>
of an drive and a USB port of a PC running DriveWizard Plus MV.
This option comprises a copy unit with USB interface, an RJ-45
cable and a USB cable.
Facilitates power cell replacement.
Refer to Periodic
Note: A maintenance space of at least 2000 mm must
Inspection &
be secured in front of the panel in order to
Maintenance on page 187.
replace Power Cells with a lifter.
Suppresses the inrush current on turning the drive power on by
adding a circuit (inrush suppression circuit panel)
<2>

210
Appendix: A
Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications and derating method for the drive.
A.1
A.2
MODEL-SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
211
A.1 Model-Specific Specifications

Class: 2 kV
Table A.1 Model-Specific Specifications (Class: 2 kV)
Item
Model: CIMR-MV2
2.4 kV Output
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity
(kW)
Motor Power (HP)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Output
Rating
Rated Output
Voltage (V)
Main
Circuit
Power
Supply
Control Circuit
Nominal
Capacity
(kVA)
Specifications
220 280 330 390 440 505 550 600
052 058 077 093 102 115 135 160 180 205
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
220 240 320 390 420 480 560 670 750 850 920 1160 1370 1620 1830 2100 2300 2500
170 190 260 310 340 380 450 530 600 680 730 930 1100 1300 1460 1680 1830 2000
200 250 300 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750
52
58
77
93 102 115 135 160 180 205 220 280 330 390 440 505 550 600
Three-phase, 2400 V (sine wave, proportional to input voltage)
Three-phase, 2400 V 20% to +10%, 60 Hz
Single-phase, 200/220 V 50/60 Hz 5%
Class: 3 kV
Item
Model: CIMR-MV2
3.3 kV Output
Nominal
Max.
Applicable
Capacity
Motor Capacity
(kVA)
(kW)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Output
Rating
Rated Output
Voltage (V)
Main Circuit
Power
Supply
Control Circuit
035
200
050
285
070
400
100
570
Specifications
140
200
260
800
1150
1500
330
1900
400
2300
520
3000
650
3700
132
200
315
450
630
900
1250
1500
1800
2500
3000
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
Three-phase, 3000 V or 3300 V (sine wave, proportional to input voltage)

Three-phase, 3000 V (50 Hz 5%) or 3300 V (50/60 Hz 5 %) 20% to +10% <1>
<1> Output not guaranteed at 10% and lower
Class: 4 kV
Item
Model: CIMR-MV2
4.16 kV Output
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity
(kW)
Motor Power (HP)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Output
Rating
Rated Output
Voltage (V)
Main Circuit
Power
Supply
Control Circuit
Nominal
Capacity
(kVA)
Specifications
250 285 315 340 375 440 505 575 625
052 058 064 077 093 102 115 125 155 190 220
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
375 420 460 550 670 735 830 900 1120 1370 1590 1800 2050 2270 2500 2700 3170 3640 4140 4500
300 330 370 440 540 590 660 720 890 1100 1270 1440 1640 1820 1960 2160 2540 2910 3310 3600
400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
52
58
64
77
93 102 115 125 155 190 220 250 285 315 340 375 440 505 575 625
Three-phase, 4160 V (sine wave, proportional to input voltage)
Three-phase, 4160 V 20% to +10%, 60 Hz
212
Class: 6 kV
Item
Model: CIMR-MV2
6.6 kV Output
Nominal
Capacity Max. Applicable
(kVA) Motor Capacity(kW)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Output
Rating
Rated Output
Voltage (V)
Main
Circuit
Power
Supply
Control Circuit
035
400
050
570
070
800
100
1150
Specifications
140
200
260
1600
2300
3000
330
3800
400
4600
520
6000
650
7500
250
400
630
900
1250
1800
2500
3000
3600
5000
6000
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650

Three-phase, 6000 V (50 Hz 5%) or 6600 V (50/60 Hz 5%) 20% to +10% <1>
Class: 11 kV
Item
Model: CIMR-MV2
035
050
070
100
Specifications
260
140
200
11 kV Output
Nominal
Capacity Max. Applicable
(kVA) Motor Capacity(kW)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Output
Rating
Rated Output
Voltage (V)
Main Circuit
Power
Supply
Control Circuit
660
950
1300
1900
2650
3800
5000
6200
7600
9900
12000
530
760
1070
1520
2130
3050
3960
5030
6100
7930
9910
35
50
70
100
140
200
260
330
400
520
650
330
400
520
<1>
<1>
<1>
<1>
650
<1>

Three-phase, 10000 V, 10500 V or 11000 V (50/60 Hz 5 %) 20% to +10% <2>
Specifications

213
A.2 Drive Specifications
A.2 Drive Specifications

Table A.6 Drive Specifications
Item
Efficiency
Power Factor
Cooling Method
Control Method
Main Circuit
Control Specifications
Frequency Control
Range
Frequency Control
Accuracy
Analog Input
Resolution
Accel/Decel Time
Torque Accuracy <1>
Overload Tolerance
Momentary Power
Loss Compensation
Time <2>
Main Control
Functions
Protective Functions
PLC Functions (Optional)
Standard Communication
Functions
Communications
(Optional) <3>
Input Transformer
Panel
Specifications
Maintainability/
Environmental
Specifications
Temperature Protection
Specifications
Approx. 97% (At rated motor speed, 100% load)
Min. 0.95 (At motor rated speed, 100% load)
Forced air-cooling by fan (with failure detection)
Open Loop Vector Control (OLV), Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV), V/f control (for multiple motor
operation), Closed Loop Vector Control for SM (optional)
Voltage-type PWM control with multiple outputs connected in series
(Power Cell: 3-level output)
0.01 to 120 Hz
0.5%
0.03 Hz
0.1 to 6000 s
0.5% (OLV), 3% (CLV)
Continuous rated current 100%, overload tolerance 110% for 1 minute and 120% for 15 seconds
Max. 2 seconds
Torque control, Droop control, Speed/torque control switch, Momentary power loss compensation, Speed
search, Overtorque detection, Torque limit, 17-step speed (max.), Accel/decel time switch, S-curve accel/decel,
Auto-tuning (rotational, stationary), Dwell, Cooling fan on/ off, Slip compensation, Torque compensation,
Frequency jump, Upper/lower limits for frequency reference, DC injection braking at start and stop, PID
control (with sleep function), MEMOBUS communication (RS-485, max. 115.2 kbps), Fault retry
Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Output ground fault, Output open-phase, Overload, Cooling-fan
error, Transformer overheat, Motor overheat, etc.
Expansion PLC board
RS-232: Digital operator
RS-485: MEMOBUS (Modbus)
USB: DriveWizard Plus MV
Any one of PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, Ethernet, or CP-215 can be installed.
Class H dry type, 5%/N/+5% tap, secondary multi-phase winding
Power Cells: protected by thermistor for temperature
Transformer: protected by thermometer PT100
Status display, Fault display, Parameter setting, Parameter reference
Power Cell construction
IP40 (simplified dustproof type)
Control Panel
Main Circuit
Protection Design
Ambient
Temperature,
5C to +40C, 85%RH max. (no condensing)
Relative Humidity
Storage Temperature 20C to +60C (for very short term when handling)
General environmental conditions, free from dust and corrosive gases
Atmosphere
Altitude: Max. 2000 m
Painting
5Y7/1 semi-gloss both for inner and outer faces
Form
Applicable Standards
Made of enclosing steel sheets, vertical standalone type, front maintenance type
JIS, JEM, JEC
<1> Adjustments, e.g. to parameters, are required after auto-tuning.

<2> When the momentary power loss compensation function is used, an uninterruptible power supply unit for the control power supply is needed
(this is an option).
<3> To use the communications function, additional wiring and the installation of an option card must be done.
For Ethernet or CP-215 communication, an optional expansion PLC board is required.
214
Index
A
A/D Conversion Error (CPF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Acceleration Error (Er-09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adjusted Slip Calculation Error (End4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Alarm (Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ALARM LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ALM LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Analog Input and Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Analog Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Approximate Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Auto-Tuning
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Entering Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Operation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Auto-Tuning Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Auto-Tuning Errors (List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Auto-Tuning Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Auto-Tuning related Parameters
Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Auto-Tuning Type (Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
B
Base Speed (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors) . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Battery Voltage Low (BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
bb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Board
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
bUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 158
C
Cable Inlet (On the Panel Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cable Length between Drive and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cannot Reset (CrST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 174
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 159
Cell Control Board
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cell Control Board (CCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
CFA (Power Cell Fault) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148
Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Communication Error (iFEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Comparing Parameter Settings (Flashing) (vrFy) . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Control Board Connection Error (CPF23). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Control Circuit Error (CPF00, CPF01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Control Circuit Error (CPF20, CPF21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Control Circuit Error (CPF26 to CPF35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Control Circuit Error (CPF40 to CPF45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Control Circuit Power Supply Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
Control Circuit Terminal Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Control Circuit Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 101
Control Fault (CF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Control Method Selection Error (oPE06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Control Mode Mismatch (CPEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Control Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LED Indicators on Cell Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
LED Indicators on Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Control Power Supply Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
CoPy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Copy Function Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 145
Copy Unit Error (CSEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CopyUnitManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CPEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CPF00, CPF01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF20, CPF21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF26 to CPF35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPF40 to CPF45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CPyE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CrST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CSEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Current Detection Error (Er-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
D
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Daily Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
dEv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 159
dFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Digital Operator
F1 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
F2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Keys and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . 112
Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
dnE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Down Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Drive
Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Parameters for Fine-Tuning Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Drive Baseblock (bb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Drive Capacity Setting Fault (oPE01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Drive Disabled (dnE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Drive Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Drive Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Drive Model Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Drive Model Mismatch (dFPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Drive Overheat Warning (oH2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Drive Overload (oL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163
Drive Ready Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
215
E
EEPROM Memory Data Error (CPF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
EEPROM Write Error (Err) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
EF0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 160
EF1 to EF16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 160
End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
End1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
End2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
End3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
End4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
End5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
End7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ENTER Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Entering Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Er-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Er-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Er-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Er-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Error Reading Data (rdEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Error Writing Data (CPyE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ESC Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Excessive PID Feedback (FbH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Excessive V/f Setting (End1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
External Fault (Input Terminal S1 to S16) (EF1 to EF16) 150, 160
F
F1 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
F2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
FAn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fan Fault (FAn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fault Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fault, Alarm and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 146
FbH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
FbL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Fine-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error (EF) . . . . . . . . . . 160
Frequency Control Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Frequency Control Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
G
GF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Ground Fault (GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
H
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hunting Prevention Gain Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hybrid IC Error (CPF22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
I
iFEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
IGBT Overheating (oH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Input Overvoltage (IOV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 161
Inrush Current Suppression Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
216
Installation
Channel Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Side-by-Side Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installing a Drive on a Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Installing Cooling Exhaust Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Insulation Resistance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Interlock Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
IOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 161
L
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Line Drop Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Line-to-Line Resistance Error (Er-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
LO/RE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
LO/RE Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LO/RE Selection Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Long Term Storage of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
M
Main Circuit Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Wire Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Max. Applicable Motor Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mechanical Weakening Detection 1 (oL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 163
Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 (UL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Megger Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete (PASS) . . 164
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) . . . . . . 146, 159
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error (SE) . 165
Middle Output Frequency Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
Minimum Output Frequency Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
Minor Fault (Er-02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Minor Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Minor Fault Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Minor Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch (ndAT) . . . . . . . . . . 177
Momentary Power Loss Compensation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection (Auto-Tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Motor Base Frequency (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors) . . 126
Motor Base Speed (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors) . . . . . . 127
Motor Data Error (Er-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Motor Direction Error (Er-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Error (End2) . . . . . . . . 171
Motor Overload (oL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 162
Motor Performance Fine-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motor Rated Capacity (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors). . . 126
Motor Rated Current (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors). . . . 126
Motor Rated Voltage (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors) . . . . 126
Motor Speed Fault (Er-11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Motor Switch during Run (rUn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error (oPE07) . . . . . . . 169
N
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ndAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
No-Load Current Alarm (End7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
No-Load Current Error (Er-05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

No-Load Operation Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Nominal Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
Notes on Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Notes on Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Notes on Routing External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Notes on Using Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Number of Motor Poles (Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors) . 127
O
oFA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
oFA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
oFA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
oFA03 to oFA06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFA10, oFA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFA12 to oFA17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFA30 to oFA43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFb00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFb02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFb03 to oFb11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFb12 to oFb17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFC00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFC01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFC02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFC03 to oFC11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oFC12 to oFC17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
oH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
oH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
oL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 162
oL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163
oL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163
oL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 163
oL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 163
Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error (oPE18) . . . . . . . . . . . 170
OOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
oPE01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
oPE02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
oPE03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
oPE05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
oPE06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
oPE07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
oPE08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
oPE09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
oPE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
oPE15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
oPE18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Open Loop Vector Control (OLV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Operator Programming Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Operator Programming Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
oPr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A (oFA01) . . 152
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A (oFA02) . . 152
(oFA03 to oFA06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
(oFA10, oFA11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
(oFA30 to oFA43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-B (oFb01) . . 153
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-B (oFb02) . . 153
(oFb03 to oFb11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C (oFC01) . . 153
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C (oFC02) . . 153

(oFC03 to oFC11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option Card External Fault (EF0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 160
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A (oFA00) . . . . . . . . . . 152
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A (oFA12 to oFA17) . . 153
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B (oFb00) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B (oFb12 to oFb17) . . . 153
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C (oFC00) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C (oFC12 to oFC17) . . 153
Option Communication Error (bUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 158
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Built-in Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Panel Housed Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Separate Installation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
oS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
Oscillation Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Output Overvoltage (OOV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
Output Phase Loss (LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Overload Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Overspeed (for Control Mode with PG) (oS) . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
Overtorque 1 (oL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overtorque 2 (oL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
P
Parameter Range Setting Error (oPE02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parameter Selection Error (oPE08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Parameters
Access Level of Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing Parameter Settings or Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Initialize Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
User Parameter Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Verifying Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Parameters to Minimize Motor Hunting and Oscillation . . . . . 140
Part Replacement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
PASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 190, 191
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Megger Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Power Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Screws, Bolts, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Periodic Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Periodic Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
PG Disconnect (for Control Mode with PG) (PGo) . . . . . . . . . 155
PG Disconnect (PGo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PG Hardware Fault (PGoH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
PG Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PGo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
PGoH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164
PID Control Selection Fault (oPE09). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
PID Feedback Loss (FbL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161
Pollution Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Cell
Measures Against Power Cell Deterioration . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Power Cell Fault (CFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148
Power Cell Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Power Cell Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
217
Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Powering Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Programming Mode Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rated Current Setting Alarm (End3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Rated Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 213
Rated Slip Error (Er-08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
rdEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
rEAd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Reading Parameter Settings (Flashing) (rEAd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Replacing Power Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Replacing the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
RESET Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Resistance Tuning Error (End5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Routing Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Routing External Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
rUn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error
(oPE05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RUN Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
RUN LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RUN LED and Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RUN LED Status and Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RUN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Task Complete (End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Test Run with Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tightening Torque
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tightening Torques
Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
TMA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
TME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TME1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TME2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Too Many Speed Search Restarts (SEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Torque Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Torque Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Torque Control Setting Error (oPE15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Transformer Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inserting Wire Ropes for Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Transformer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Transformer Temperature DI Fault (TME2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transformer Temperature Fault (TMA1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Transformer Temperature Fault (TME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transformer Temperature Fault 1 (TME1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transportation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inserting Wire Ropes for Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Troubleshooting without Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Scope of Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Sequence Input and Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sequence Input Selection Error (oPE03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
SEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) . . . . . . . . . 159
Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Displaying the Setup Group screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Setup Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Short Term Storage of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Side-by-Side Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Slip Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Panel Related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Power Cell Related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Storing Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Speed Deviation (dEv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with PG) (dEv) . . . . . . . . 159
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 . . 138
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 . . 139
Standard Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Start-Up Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
STOP Button Input (Er-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
STOP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Storage Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Storing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Storing Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Switching between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
218
UL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 165

UL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 165
UL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 165
Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 165
Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 165
Undervoltage (Uv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Undervoltage (Uv1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Up Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
USB Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
User Parameter Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Uv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Uv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
V
V/f Control (V/f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
V/f Control Mode
Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
V/f Data Setting Error (oPE10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
vAEr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
vFyE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Viewing Fault Trace Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch (vAEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Voltage Unbalance (VUB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 166
vrFy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
VUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 166
W
Warning Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Wire Gauges
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Wiring
Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Writing Parameter Settings (Flashing) (CoPy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
219
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
Published in Japan
December 2011 11-12
Asia
Date of original publication

Date of publication
Date of
Publication
December 2011
220
Revision
Number
Section
Revised Content
First Edition
Super Energy-Saving Medium-Voltage AC Drive
FSDrive-MV1000
Instructions
TOKYO OFFICE
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo 105-6891 Japan
Phone 81-3-5402-4502 Fax 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA MOTOMAN CANADA LTD.

298 Labrosse Pointe Claire, QC H9R 5L8, Canada
Phone 1-514-693-6770 Fax 1-514-693-9212
http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.

Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Sao Paulo-SP CEP 04304-000, Brazil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH

Hauptstrasse 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Yeoungdungpo-gu, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. 17F, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION

No.34,Sihyuan Rd.,Sinjhuang City, Taipei County 242, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-6635-7030 Fax 886-2-6635-7010
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
2011 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

Published in Japan December 2011 11-12
10-11-3-C

EZZ010926 MV1000 Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EZZ010926 MV1000 Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Super Energy-Saving Medium-Voltage AC Drive

MANUAL NO. EZZ010926

Start-Up Programming &

Periodic Inspection &

Copyright 2011 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION.

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

PREFACE AND GENERAL SAFETY .................................................................... 7

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 39

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

Checking the Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 73

START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION ................................................... 105

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

4.5 Power Up and Checking the Operation Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 135

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large

PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE..................................................... 187

OPTIONS ............................................................................................................ 207

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 211

Revision History............................................................................................................. 220

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.1 Before Using the Product

Before Using the Product

Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.

Terms and Abbreviations

Drive, MV1000: Yaskawa FSDrive-MV1000 Series MV1000

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

Supplemental Safety Information

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Electrical Shock Hazard

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Sudden Movement Hazard

Electrical Shock Hazard

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

Drive Label Warning

Serial number nameplate

Serial number nameplate

Serial number nameplate

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.2 General Safety

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.3 Mechanical Interlock

A Medium voltage panel

C Medium voltage panel

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EZZ010926 FSDrive-MV1000 Instructions

i.4 Notes on Using Drives